457746
120
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/120
Pagina verder
VQT3C73
Operating Instructions
Dear customer
Thank you for purchasing this product. For optimum performance and safety, please read these instructions carefully.
Before connecting, operating or adjusting this product, please read the instructions completely.
Please keep this manual for future reference.
This Blu-ray Disc recorder is equipped with a Common Interface. It can receive encrypted and free-to-air DVB-S/S2
services.
The tuner in this unit is only compatible with DVB-S/S2.
DVB and the DVB logos are trademarks of the DVB Project.
Blu-ray Disc™ Recorder
Model No. DMR-BST800
DMR-BST700
DMR-BST701
Region management information
BD-Video: This unit plays BD-Video marked with labels
containing the region code “B”.
DVD-Video:
This unit plays DVD-Video marked with labels
containing the region number “2 or “ALL”.
Example: Example:
Web Site: http://www.panasonic-europe.com
until
2011/06/13
EG
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 1 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
VQT3C73
2
Unit
To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock or product
damage,
Do not expose this unit to rain, moisture, dripping or
splashing.
Do not place objects filled with liquids, such as vases, on
this unit.
Use only the recommended accessories.
Do not remove covers.
Do not repair this unit by yourself. Refer servicing to
qualified service personnel.
Do not let metal objects fall inside this unit.
Do not place heavy items on this unit.
AC mains lead
To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock or product
damage,
Ensure that the power supply voltage corresponds to the
voltage printed on this unit.
Insert the mains plug fully into the socket outlet.
Do not pull, bend, or place heavy items on the lead.
Do not handle the plug with wet hands.
Hold onto the mains plug body when disconnecting the
plug.
Do not use a damaged mains plug or socket outlet.
Install this unit so that the AC mains lead can be
unplugged from the socket outlet immediately if any
problem occurs.
SD card
Keep the Memory Card out of reach of children to prevent
swallowing.
Unit
This unit utilizes a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or
performance of procedures other than those specified
herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Do not place sources of naked flames, such as lighted
candles, on this unit.
This unit may receive radio interference caused by mobile
telephones during use. If such interference occurs, please
increase separation between this unit and the mobile
telephone.
This unit is intended for use in moderate climates.
Placement
Place this unit on an even surface.
To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock or product
damage,
Do not install or place this unit in a bookcase, built-in
cabinet or in another confined space. Ensure this unit is
well ventilated.
Do not obstruct this unit’s ventilation openings with
newspapers, tablecloths, curtains, and similar items.
Do not expose this unit to direct sunlight, high
temperatures, high humidity, and excessive vibration.
Batteries
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the type recommended by the
manufacturer.
Mishandling of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage and
may cause a fire.
Do not mix old and new batteries or different types at the
same time.
Do not heat or expose to flame.
Do not leave the battery(ies) in a car exposed to direct
sunlight for a long period of time with doors and windows
closed.
Do not take apart or short circuit.
Do not recharge alkaline or manganese batteries.
Do not use batteries if the covering has been peeled off.
Remove batteries if you do not intend to use the remote
control for a long period of time. Store in a cool, dark
place.
When disposing the batteries, please contact your local
authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of
disposal.
Safety precautions
WARNING CAUTION
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 2 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Getting started
VQT3C73
3
Getting started
[BST8 00]
3D video and 3D photo playback (> 46,
60)
3D videos and 3D photos can be played back when this
unit is connected to a 3D compatible TV using a High
Speed HDMI Cable and 2D video can be enjoyed as 3D
virtually.
Wireless connection (> 16, 23)
This unit supports Wi-Fi technology and it is possible to
make a wireless connection.
[BST800 ] A wireless LAN is built in.
[BST700 ] [BST70 1] A wireless connection can be made with
the Wireless LAN Adaptor (optional).
DLNA (> 80, 81)
You can enjoy the video and photos saved on the HDD of
this unit on DLNA (Client) compatible equipment
connected via a network. Additionally, you can enjoy
viewing video, photos and music saved on a DLNA
Certified media server and Panasonic DLNA compatible
recorders.
VIERA CAST (> 77)
Internet services (such as YouTube, Picasa Web Albums,
video communication, etc.) can be accessed easily by
using the VIERA CAST button.
EPG (> 29, 35)
Timer recording is made easier because the TV Guide
allows you to see programme information.
Please check and identify the supplied accessories.
(Product numbers correct as of May 2011. These may be
subject to change.)
1 Remote control
(N2QAYB000616)
2 Batteries for remote control
1 AC mains lead
Do not use AC mains lead with other equipment.
Declaration of Conformity (DoC)
Hereby, “Panasonic Corporation” declares that this product
is in compliance with the essential requirements and other
relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Customers can download a copy of the original DoC to our
R&TTE products from our DoC server:
http://www.doc.panasonic.de
Contact to Authorised Representative: Panasonic
Marketing Europe GmbH,
Panasonic Testing Centre, Winsbergring 15, 22525
Hamburg, Germany
This product is intended to be used in the following
countries.
Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Cyprus, Czech Republic,
Denmark, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary,
Ireland, Italy, Iceland, Liechtenstein, Luxembourg, Malta,
Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Slovakia,
Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, United Kingdom, Switzerland
This product is intended for general consumer. (Category 3)
The WLAN feature of this product shall exclusively be used
inside buildings.
This product on purpose to connect to access point of
2.4GHz or 5GHz WLAN.
CLASS 1
LASER PRODUCT
(Inside of product)
Features
Supplied accessories
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 3 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
VQT3C73
4
Table of contents
Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Getting started
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Supplied accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
HDD and media information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Recording mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
HDD and media you can use for recording and
play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Control reference guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
CI module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Basic connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Network connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Other TV connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Amplifier connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Common Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
HOLD function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Basic operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Menu screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
FUNCTION MENU screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Easy Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Network Easy Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Auto Setup method when using a single cable
router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Watching broadcasts
Watching broadcasts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Using Channel List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Channel information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Operations while watching broadcast. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Using TV Guide system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
REWIND LIVE TV/PAUSE LIVE TV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Recording
Recording TV programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Operation during Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Direct TV Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Notes for recording of an encrypted broadcast . . . . . . . . . 34
Timer recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Manually programming timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Timer recording options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Timer recording from channel information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
To cancel recording when timer recording has already
begun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Notes on timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
To confirm and edit a timer programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Playing back video
Playing BD-Video or DVD-Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Enjoying BD-Live or picture-in-picture in
BD-Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Playing recorded video contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Using the DIRECT NAVIGATOR (VIDEO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Playback from Chapter View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Operation during play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Enjoying 3D video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Editing video
Deleting recorded titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Editing recorded titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Copying video
Copying titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Copying to HDD with DIRECT NAVIGATOR . . . . . . . . . . 54
Copying titles with copying list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Notes for copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Copying Title Playing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Copying HD Video (AVCHD format) from HDD . . . . . . . . 58
Copying a finalised disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Photo
Playing photos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Photo play option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Slideshow Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Editing photos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Copying photos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Selecting and copying the photos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Copying automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Music
Playing music/Copying music to HDD . . . . . . . . . . 66
Playing music recorded on HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Operations during music play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Useful functions during music play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Editing music/playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
With Other Equipment
Recording from external equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Manual Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Flexible Recording via AV input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Linked timer recording (SKY Digital STB, etc.)
–EXT LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Copying the HD Video or the SD Video . . . . . . . . . 72
Copying HD Video (AVCHD format) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Copying SD Video (MPEG2 format) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Convenient functions
Media management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Enjoying VIERA CAST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
To enjoy video communication (ex. Skype
TM
) . . . . . . . . . . 77
VIERA Link/Q Link functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Playing contents from other equipment
(Server) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Playing contents on other equipment
(Client) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Playback menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Changing the unit’s settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Common procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
DVB Tuning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
HDD / Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Software (Firmware) Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Update software (firmware) of this unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
CI Plus compatible CAM software (firmware)
update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Other Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Switching the aspect ratio of the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
TV operation setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 4 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Watching broadcasts
Recording
Playing back video
Editing video
Copying video
Photo
With Other Equipment
Music
Convenient functions
Troubleshooting
Reference
Getting started
VQT3C73
5
Troubleshooting
Messages on the unit’s display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Displays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
TV screen and video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Recording, timer recording and copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Photo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
USB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
TV Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Broadcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
VIERA Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
To reset this unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Reference
Unit care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Regarding DivX and MKV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Operations that can be performed
simultaneously . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Operations that can be performed while recording or
copying a title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Starting the timer recording while executing other
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Audio information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Maximum numbers of titles that can be recorded . . . . . . 111
About JPEG/MPO/MP3/DivX/
MKV/MPEG2/AVCHD files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Recording modes and approximate recording
times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
About descriptions in these operating instructions
These operating instructions are applicable to models DMR-
BST800, DMR-BST700 and DMR-BST701. The illustrations in
these Operating Instructions show images of DMR-BST800 unless
otherwise indicated.
[BST800] :indicates features applicable to DMR-BST800 only.
[BST700] :indicates features applicable to DMR-BST700 only.
[BST701] :indicates features applicable to DMR-BST701 only.
Pages to be referred to are indicated as “> ±±”.
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 5 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Getting started
VQT3C73
6
HDD and media information
§1
The SD quality programme can not be converted to HD quality.
§2
You cannot select during play whether it appears or disappears.
¾ Recording modes and approximate recording times (> 113)
FR (Flexible Recording Mode)
The unit automatically selects a recording rate between XP and EP (8 hours) that will enable the recordings to fit in the
remaining disc space with the best possible recording quality.
(–: Impossible)
Recording mode
Recording Mode DR HG/HX/HE/HL/HM XP/SP/LP/EP,
FR (> below)
Feature Programmes can be recorded
in a nearly perfect broadcasted
state.
Recording can be done with
reduced recording volume in
HD quality.
Recording can be done with
reduced recording volume in
SD quality.
Quality Quality as the broadcast
High definition
§1
Standard definition
Recordable media
Multiple audio
(audio language)
Record all multiple audio Record only one audio
Subtitles / Teletext Can be recorded
Can be recorded (only one subtitle or teletext)
§2
Surround audio Surround audio as the
broadcast
Depends on the settings (> 90,
Audio for HG / HX / HE / HL /
HM Recording)
Stereo audio
HDD and media you can use for recording and play
Media type Standard symbol Recordable contents Playable contents
Hard disk drive (HDD)
§1
[HDD]
Video
§2
AVCHD
JPEG
MPO
Music copied from music CD
MP3
BD-Video
[BD-V]
Movie and music
BD-RE
§1
[BD-RE]
Video
§2
AVCHD
JPEG
MPO
BD-R
[BD-R]
Video
§2
AVCHD
§3
DivX
®
MKV
DVD-Video
§4
[DVD-V]
Movie and music
Video in finalised disc
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 6 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Getting started
VQT3C73
7
(–: Impossible)
§1
Rewritable media
§2
Compatible with recording copyright protected titles ([RAM] CPRM compatible disc only).
§3
This unit can playback media recorded with AVCHD compatible devices (Panasonic video camera, etc.).
However, it may not be able to playback, add, or edit depending on the device that was used to record.
§4
Includes finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R and +R DL.
§5
It cannot be played back directly from the media. Playback is possible by copying to the HDD.
[BD-R] LTH type is also supported.
[+RW] 8X Speed +RW disc is not supported.
[USB] Video images of the copyright-protected DivX contents stored on USB device can be output only through the HDMI output terminal.
With certain recording states and folder structures, the play order may differ or playback may not be possible.
Media type Standard symbol Recordable contents Playable contents
DVD-RAM
§1
[RAM]
Video
§2
JPEG
MPO
AVCHD
§3
DVD-R
DVD-R DL
[DVD-R]
Video
AVCHD
§3
DivX
®
MKV
JPEG
MPO
MP3
DVD-RW
§1
[DVD-RW]
Video
AVCHD
§3
+R/+R DL [+R]
Video
AVCHD
§3
+RW
§1
[+RW]
Video
AVCHD
§3
Audio CD (CD-DA)
[CD]
Music
CD
(including CD-R/RW)
DivX
®
MKV
JPEG
MPO
MP3
SD Cards
§1
[SD]
JPEG
MPO
AVCHD
MPEG2
§5
JPEG
MPO
USB memories [USB]
AVCHD
§3, 5
MPEG2
§5
DivX
®
MKV
JPEG
MPO
MP3
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 7 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Getting started
VQT3C73
8
HDD and media information
The manufacturer accepts no responsibility and offers
no compensation for loss of recorded or edited material
due to a problem with the unit or recordable media, and
accepts no responsibility and offers no compensation
for any subsequent damage caused by such loss.
Examples of causes of such losses are
A disc recorded and edited with this unit is played in a Blu-
ray Disc Recorder or computer disc drive manufactured by
another company.
A disc used as described above and then played again in
this unit.
A disc recorded and edited with a Blu-ray Disc Recorder or
computer disc drive manufactured by another company is
played in this unit.
Disc recorded on another device
DVD-RW recorded in DVD Video Recording (DVD-VR)
format
This unit can playback and copy to HDD.
This unit does not support editing or recording.
It is possible to record and edit with DVD-Video format
by formatting discs with this unit.
It may be necessary to finalize the disc or close the
session on the equipment used for recording to play on
this unit.
Discs recorded on equipment other than this unit may
not be used for recording on this unit.
Play on other players
[BD-RE] [BD-R]
It can be played on the players compatible with BD-RE
(Ver. 2.1) and BD-R.
When BD-RE and BD-R cannot be played back on
other Blu-ray Disc players, etc. (e.g., title recorded with
HE-AAC audio format), convert the recording mode to
play them back. (> 50, File Conversion)
[DVD-R] [DVD-RW] [+R] [+RW]
Finalisation is needed. (> 75)
[+RW]
If the disc failed to play on other equipment, we
recommend you create a Top Menu (> 75).
Regarding 8 cm Disc
This unit cannot record or edit the 8 cm disc. Only
playback or copy to the HDD is possible.
Discs that cannot be played
DVD-RAM that cannot be removed from their cartridges
2.6 and 5.2 GB DVD-RAM, 12 cm
DVD-Audio
HD DVD
WMA discs, DivX Plus HD discs
Super Video CD, Super Audio CD, Video CD
+R (8 cm), CD-ROM, Photo CD, PD, etc.
The producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you may
not always be able to control play as described in these operating
instructions. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.
Operation and sound quality of CDs that do not conform to CD-DA
specifications (copy control CDs, etc.) cannot be guaranteed.
This unit does not guarantee connection with all USB
devices.
FAT16 and FAT32 file systems are supported.
This unit supports USB 2.0 High Speed.
Although this unit can use USB 3.0 devices as USB 2.0
devices, in certain cases USB 3.0 devices cannot be used
due to differing connector shape, larger current ratings,
etc. (Use of USB 2.0 devices is recommended.)
This unit’s USB port does not support bus-powered USB device.
USB memories support DivX and MKV files less than 4 GB.
When using Communication Camera (TY-CC10W) or Wireless LAN
Adaptor (DY-WL10), connect it to the rear terminal of this unit. (> 16,
77)
Notes
Notes for the disc
Notes for the USB devices
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 8 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Getting started
VQT3C73
9
Compatible SD card
SD Memory Card (from 8 MB to 2 GB)
SDHC Memory Card (from 4 GB to 32 GB)
SDXC Memory Card (48 GB, 64 GB)
This unit is compatible with SD Memory Cards that
meet SD Card Specifications FAT12 and FAT16
formats, as well as SDHC Memory Cards in FAT32
format and SDXC Memory Cards in exFAT format.
Setting the protection
Using miniSD card or microSD card
Useable memory is slightly less than the card capacity.
If the SD card is formatted on other equipment, the time necessary for
recording may be longer. Also, if the SD card is formatted on a PC, you
may not be able to use it on this unit. In these cases, format the card on
this unit (> 74).
SDHC Memory Cards and SDXC Memory Cards can be used in
equipment that is compatible with the appropriate cards. (SDHC Memory
Cards can also be used in equipment compatible with SDXC Memory
Cards)
Using either of these cards in a non-compatible PC or non-
compatible equipment may result in formatting etc. and the loss of
recorded content.
How to hold a disc or SD card
Do not touch the recorded surface or the terminal surface.
If there is dirt or condensation on the disc
Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.
Handling precautions
Do not attach labels or stickers to discs.
Do not use record cleaning sprays, benzine, thinner, static
electricity prevention liquids or any other solvent.
Do not use ballpoint pens or other hard writing implements,
when writing on the label side of the disc.
Do not expose the terminals of the SD card to water,
garbage or other strange things.
Do not drop stack, or impact discs. Do not place objects on
them.
Do not use the following discs:
Discs with exposed adhesive from removed stickers or
labels (rental discs, etc.).
Discs that are badly warped or cracked.
Do not place in the following areas:
In direct sunlight.
In very dusty or humid areas.
Near a heater.
Locations susceptible to significant difference in
temperature (condensation can occur).
Where static electricity or electromagnetic waves occur.
Notes for the SD cards
Switch the write-protect switch to the
“LOCK” position.
Mini-type and micro-type cards can
also be used, but must be used with
adaptor cards. These are usually
supplied with such cards, or
otherwise customer provided.
LOCK
e.g.,
Media handling
– Irregularly shaped discs, such as
heart shapes.
DO
DO NOT
DO DO NOT
DO NOT
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 9 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Getting started
VQT3C73
10
Control reference guide
Instructions for operations are generally described using the remote control.
Remote control
1 Turn the unit on or off (> 20, 22)
2 Select drive (HDD, BD, SD or USB) (> 20)
3 Select channels and title numbers, etc./Enter numbers or characters
(The character buttons may be used when operating VIERA CAST
contents.)
4 To delete unwanted recorded titles, timer programmes, photos or music
(> 47)
5 Basic operations for recording and play
6 Programme information within TV Guide screen (> 29)/
Show channel information (> 28)/
Show Information (> 42)/Show status messages (> 44)
7 Selection/OK (> 21), Frame-by-frame (> 45)
8 Show DIRECT NAVIGATOR, Top Menu, Pop-up Menu (> 39, 41)
9 Show OPTION menu (> 48, 62, 69)
: Colour buttons
Use in accordance with instruction on the screen.
; Recording functions (> 31)
< Show Teletext (> 28)
= Show subtitles (> 28)
> Create chapter (> 43)
? Skip the specified time (> 45)
@ Transmit the remote control signal
Point it at remote control signal sensor on this unit. (> 11)
A TV operation area (> 98)
B Channel select (> 27)/
Change pages in the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen etc. (> 41)
C Show VIERA CAST (> 77)
D Input select (> 27, 31, 70)
E Start up a video communication (> 77)
F Exit the menu screen
G Show the TV Guide screen (>
29)
H S
how FUNCTION MENU screen (> 21)
I Return to previous screen
J Direct TV Recording (> 33)
K EXT LINK function (> 71)
L Timer Recording screen (> 36)
M Select audio (> 28, 45)
N Skip approx. 1 minute forward (> 44)
O Skip approx. 10 seconds backward (> 44)
Insert batteries
Insert so the poles (i and j) match those in the remote control.
Use alkaline or manganese batteries.
STATUS
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
G
U
I
D
E
RETURN
PLAY/x1.3
PAUSE
PAUSE LIVE TV
STOP
SLOW/SEARCH
SKIP
CH
PAGE
SELECT
INPUT
CH
AV
INPUT
TV
DRIVE
SELECT
DEL
EXIT
OK
OPTION
VOL
0
2
abc
5
jkl
8
tuv
1
4
ghi
7
qrs
p
3
def
6
mno
9
xyz
w
TIME SLIP
PROG/CHECK
DIRECT TV REC
AUDIO
-10s +60s
REC MODE EXT LINK
REC
TEXT STTL
CHAPTER
MANUAL SKIP
REWIND LIVE TV
R6/LR6, AA
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 10 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Getting started
VQT3C73
11
Main unit
1 Standby/on switch (Í/I) (> 20, 22)
Press to switch the unit from on to standby mode or vice
versa. In standby mode, the unit is still consuming a
small amount of power.
2 Disc tray (> 20)
3 Blue LED
It is possible to set the LED to turn on/off. (> 90)
4 Recording indicator
The indicator will light up while recording.
The indicator will blink while recording is paused.
5 CALL LED
The LED will light up when this unit receives incoming
call etc. of the video communication. (> 77)
6 Remote control signal sensor
Angle: Approx. 20° up and down, 30° left and right
Distance: Within approx. 7 m in front of the unit
7 Open/close disc tray (> 20)
8 USB port (> 20)
9 SD card slot (> 20)
: Stop
; Start play
< [BST800 ] HDMI (SUB) V.OFF LED (Video off LED)
It is possible to set the LED to turn on/off. (> 90)
= CI (Common Interface) slot
> CI module eject button
¾ Rear panel terminals (> 14)
%1//10+06'4(#%' ','%6

Pull to flip down the
front panel.
? Display
1 Disc indicator
2 Copying indicator (> 50)
3 USB port indicator
4 SD card slot indicator
5 EXT LINK indicator
6 Timer recording indicator
This indicator lights up when the timer recording
standby is activated.
7 Remote control signal indicator
8 Drive (HDD, BD or SD) indicator
9 Main display section indicator
Current time/playback counter, various messages
10 Playback indicator
PLAY
COPY
EXT -L
SDUSB
HDD
SD
BD
2 3 41 5 6
7
8
910
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 11 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Getting started
VQT3C73
12
CI module
An appropriate CI module is required to view or record the encrypted broadcast.
You need a CI module, CAM (Conditional Access Module) together with a certified Smart Card, and a subscription with the
corresponding broadcaster.
If not viewing/recording an encrypted broadcast, you do not need to insert the CI module.
1 Insert the certified Smart Card into the CAM (both optional).
2 Insert the CI module into the CI (Common Interface) slot of this unit.
TV service encryption is automatically cancelled and the service can be viewed or recorded. (The recording might be
prohibited by broadcasters.)
Depending on the CI module, a PIN may be demanded. If prompted to enter a PIN code, enter the set PIN code with the
number buttons.
¾ Notes for recording of an encrypted broadcast (> 34)
You can insert one or two different CAMs with Smart Cards into this unit.
Be sure to insert the CI module horizontally into the slot.
Insert the CAM and the Smart Card with the correct direction.
When removing the CI module, press the CI module eject button and pull it straight out.
For more details, see the manual of the CAM and Smart Card, or consult the dealer.
The Common Interface supports the modules according to DVB Specification and CI Plus Specification.
Turn off the unit before you insert or remove the CI module.
CAM
Smart Card
CI module
CI (Common Interface) slot
This unit
CI module
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 12 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Getting started
VQT3C73
13
About CI Plus compatible broadcast
“CI Plus” is a technical specification that imposes copy protection on the broadcasted programmes.
All CI Plus protected programmes are encrypted.
It may take some time to display the encrypted programme.
Retention limit
There are some titles for which the playback is disabled after a predetermined time.
(e.g., Permitted playback period is 90 minutes after recording.)
When the programme is imposed a limit on the playable period, the icon will appear on the
DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen after recording. (> 41)
These titles cannot be copied to the disc. (> below, Copying is prohibited)
CI Plus copy protection
When the CI Plus compatible broadcast is recorded, the title may be copy protected.
There are following types of the copy protection depending on the broadcast:
Copying not restricted
Depending on the programme, you can copy only to BD-RE, BD-R, or DVD-RAM (CPRM compatible discs only).
One generation copy is permitted
You can copy to BD-RE, BD-R or DVD-RAM (CPRM compatible discs only) only once.
However, the original title will be deleted.
You cannot copy from the copied BD-RE, BD-R or DVD-RAM (CPRM compatible discs) to HDD or another disc.
Copying is prohibited
You cannot copy to the disc.
For details, refer to your CAM’s operating instructions or consult your dealer.
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 13 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Getting started
VQT3C73
14
Connection
When connected to an HDMI compatible unit, you can enjoy high quality, digital video and audio.
3D programmes can be played back when this unit is connected to a 3D compatible TV using an HDMI cable.
Before connection, turn off all equipment and read the appropriate operating instructions.
When using Communication Camera (> 77)
Required setting:
Set “HDMI Audio Output” to “On” (> 91).
(The default setting is “On”.)
Basic connections
Satellite cable
To record 2 programmes simultaneously or view TV during recording
A Connect both LNB IN 1 and LNB IN 2 to the satellite dish.
B When using Single cable router, connect satellite cable to LNB IN 1 terminal and activate two user bands. (> 26)
When you use only one satellite cable
C Connect LNB IN 1 terminal. (2 programmes simultaneous recording and viewing TV during recording are
impossible)
AC IN
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
L
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
AV1
(TV)
VIDEO
RGB/S VIDEO

AV2
(EXT)
VIDEO
RGB/S VIDEO

OUT
IN 1IN 1
IN 2IN 2
LNB 13V/ 18V 400mA max
COMMUNICATION
CAMERA
MAINMAIN
SUBSUB
HDMI
IN 1IN 1
IN 2IN 2
LNB 13V/ 18V 400mA max
IN 1IN 1
IN 2IN 2
LNB 13V/ 18V 400mA max
IN 1IN 1
IN 2IN 2
LNB 13V/ 18V 400mA max
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
IN 1
IN 1
IN 2
IN 2
L
NB 13V/ 18V 400mA max
COMMUNIC
AT
CAMERA
WIRELESS LAN
ADAPTOR
TV
Satellite dish
This unit’s rear panel
To household mains
socket
(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)
Cooling fan
AC mains lead
(supplied)
Connect only after all
other connections are
complete.
HDMI cable
[BST 700] [BST701]
Satellite cable (> above)
Satellite dish
Satellite dish
Multi switcher Single cable
router
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 14 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Getting started
VQT3C73
15
¾ If the TV does not have the HDMI terminal, connect
the TV with the 21-pin Scart cable or Audio/Video
cable (> 17)
Supply power from another device when you use 2 or more devices to
receive satellite broadcast, because this unit does not supply power
when it is turned in standby.
About HDMI cable
Please use High Speed HDMI Cables that have the HDMI
logo (as shown on the cover).
When outputting 1080p signal, please use HDMI Cables
5.0 meters or less.
Recommended Panasonic HDMI cable part number:
RP-CDHS15 (1.5 m), RP-CDHS30 (3.0 m), RP-CDHS50
(5.0 m), etc.
The HDMI connection supports VIERA Link “HDAVI Control” (> 78).
However, to perform PAUSE LIVE TV (> 30) and Direct TV Recording
(> 33) for programmes that cannot be received by this unit, you need to
connect a 21-pin Scart cable (> 17). ([BST800] VIERA Link “HDAVI
Control” can only be used on the connection from the HDMI (MAIN)
terminal.)
You cannot connect this unit to DVI devices that are incompatible with
HDCP.
Depending on the device, images may not display properly or at all when
connecting with a DVI/HDMI switching cable. (Audio cannot be output.)
If you are connecting to a TV that is only compatible with 2 channel
audio output, audio with 3 channels or more will be down mixed (> 116)
and output as 2 channels, even if connecting with an HDMI cable.
(Some discs cannot be down mixed.)
A 21-pin adaptor is required for AUDIO/VIDEO terminal.
When the unit is not to be used for a long time
To save power, unplug it from the household mains socket.
This unit consumes a small amount of power, even when it
is turned off
[approx. 0.2 W (“Power Save in Standby” is activated)]
Connect the Set Top Box or video
equipment
AXIAL
L
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
T
AV1
(TV)
VIDEO
RGB/S VIDEO

AV2
(EXT)
VIDEO
RGB/S VIDEO

OUT
AV
This unit’s rear panel
Set Top Box or video equipment
21-pin Scart cable
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 15 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Getting started
VQT3C73
16
Connection
Following functions will be available when this unit is
connected to the network.
DLNA functions (> 80, 81)
Network Service functions (> 77)
BD-Live functions with Internet (> 39)
Automatically acquiring the title of the CD (> 66)
Updating the software (firmware) of this unit from Internet
(> 97)
For details about connection method, refer to the
instructions supplied with the connected equipment.
Use category 5 or above straight LAN cables (STP) when connecting to
peripheral devices.
Inserting any cable other than a LAN cable in the LAN terminal can
damage the unit.
[BST800] Wireless LAN is built in. (There is no need to
connect a Wireless LAN Adaptor.)
[BST700] [BST701] Connect the Wireless LAN Adaptor DY-
WL10 (optional).
[BST700] [BST701] Only the Wireless LAN Adaptor DY-WL10 (optional)
can be used. Read the operating instructions for the Wireless LAN
Adaptor DY-WL10 (optional) thoroughly when using it.
Connect/disconnect the Wireless LAN adaptor DY-WL10 (optional) when
the unit is turned off and not using functions that use the network, such
as downloading a programme, etc.
For up to date compatibility information on your Wireless router refer to
http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/
(This site is in English only.)
The unit is not compatible with public wireless LAN services provided in
airports, stations, cafes etc.
Network connection
LAN (ethernet) cable connection
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
IN 1
IN 1
IN 2
IN 2
LNB 13V/ 18V 400mA max
COMMUNICATION
CAMERA
MAIN
MAIN
SUB
SUB
Broadband router, etc.
Internet
LAN cable
This unit’s rear panel
Wireless LAN connection
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
L
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
OUT
IN 1IN 1
IN 2IN 2
LNB 13V/ 18V 400mA max
COMMUNICATION
CAMERA
WIRELESS LAN
ADAPTOR
Internet
Wireless router,
etc.
This unit’s rear panel
([BST70 0] [BST701])
Wireless LAN
Adaptor
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 16 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Getting started
VQT3C73
17
Precautions of Wireless LAN connection
The following limits are in place regarding the usage of this
unit. You must be aware of these limits before using this unit.
Panasonic will in no way be responsible for any incidental
damage which may arise due to a failure to obey these
limits, or to any condition of use or disuse of this unit.
Data transmitted and received over radio waves may
be intercepted and monitored.
This unit contains delicate electronic components.
Please use this unit in the manner in which it was intended
and follow the following points:
Do not expose this unit to high temperatures or direct
sunlight.
Do not bend, or subject this unit to strong impacts.
Keep this unit away from moisture.
Do not disassemble or alter this unit in any way.
Set according to the connected TV. (> 92, AV1 Output)
The 21-pin Scart cable connection with the Q Link compatible TV
supports “Q Link” (> 78).
Connect to terminals of the same colour.
Other TV connections
21-pin Scart terminal
XIAL
AV1
(TV)
VIDEO
RGB/S VIDEO

AV2
(EXT)
VIDEO
RGB/S VIDEO

OUT
L
VIDEO
R
AUDIO
AV
21-pin Scart cable
TV
This unit’s rear panel
AUDIO/VIDEO terminals
Connect the unit directly to the TV
If you connect the unit through an AV
selector or VCR to the TV, video signal
will be affected by copy protection
systems and the picture may not be
shown correctly.
When connecting to a TV with a
built-in VCR
Connect to the input terminals on the
TV side if there are both TV and VCR
input terminals.
XIAL
AV1
(TV)
VIDEO
RGB/S VIDEO

AV2
(EXT)
VIDEO
RGB/S VIDEO

OUT
L
VIDEO
R
AUDIO
AUDIO IN VIDEO IN
LR
Audio/Video cable
TV
This unit’s rear panel
TV
VCR
This unit
DO NOT
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 17 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Getting started
VQT3C73
18
Connection
Linked operation is possible by connecting to a TV or amplifier
compatible with VIERA Link.
When using a TV or an amplifier that does not display “ARC compatible”
on the HDMI terminal (not compatible with ARC), it is necessary to
connect the TV and the amplifier with a digital audio cable to enjoy the
TV audio on the amplifier.
Linked operation is possible by connecting to a TV or amplifier
compatible with VIERA Link.
When using a TV or an amplifier that does not display “ARC compatible”
on the HDMI terminal (not compatible with ARC), it is necessary to
connect the TV and the amplifier with a digital audio cable to enjoy the
TV audio on the amplifier.
Amplifier connections
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
A
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
IN 1IN 1
IN 2IN 2
LNB 13V/ 18V 400mA max
COMMUNICATION
CAMERA
MAINMAIN
SUBSUB
HDMI
HDMI INHDMI OUT
This unit’s rear panel
HDMI cable
Amplifier
TV
HDMI cable
(ARC compatible)
(ARC compatible)
3D programmes can be played back when this unit
is connected to a 3D compatible amplifier and a 3D
compatible TV using an HDMI cable.
You will not be able to view 3D programmes with this
connection if your amplifier is not 3D compatible.
When connecting an amplifier not
compatible with 3D
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
IN 1IN 1
IN 2IN 2
LNB 13V/ 18V 400mA max
COMMUNICATION
CAMERA
MAINMAIN
SUBSUB
HDMI IN
HDMI
HDMI
This unit’s rear panel
HDMI cable
Amplifier
TV
HDMI cable
(ARC compatible)
(ARC compatible)
3D programmes can be played back when this unit
is connected to a 3D compatible TV using an HDMI
cable.
The audio can only be up to 5.1ch.
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 18 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Getting started
VQT3C73
19
[BST8 00]
You can enjoy richer sound by using the HDMI AV OUT
(SUB) terminal.
The VIERA Link function does not work with equipment connected to the
HDMI (SUB) terminal.
Set the “HDMI (SUB) Output Mode” to “V. OFF ( Video Off )”.
If it is set to “Normal” when the amplifier not compatible with 3D is
connected to the HDMI (SUB) terminal, playback of 3D video is not
possible with the power of the amplifier set to “ON”. (> 91, HDMI (SUB)
Output Mode)
Using Optical digital audio cable
Using Coaxial cable
When connecting a TV with an HDMI terminal, set “HDMI Audio Output
to “Off” (> 91).
When you use the optical digital audio cable, insert the tip correctly into
the terminal.
Via an HDMI AV OUT (MAIN) and
HDMI AV OUT (SUB) terminal
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
IN 1IN 1
IN 2IN 2
LNB 13V/ 18V 400mA max
COMMUNICATION
CAMERA
MAINMAIN
SUBSUB
HDMI
HDMI IN
This unit’s rear panel
HDMI cable
Amplifier
TV
HDMI cable
3D programmes can be played back when this unit
is connected to a 3D compatible TV using an HDMI
cable.
Connect the TV and the amplifier with the following
cables to enjoy the audio from the TV with the
amplifier.
ARC compatible: HDMI cable
ARC not compatible: HDMI cable and optical digital
cable
When using DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
terminal
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
L
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV1
(TV)
VIDEO
RGB/S VIDEO

AV2
(EXT)
VIDEO
RGB/S VIDEO

OUT
COMMUNICATION
CAMERA
MAINMAIN
SUBSUB
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
OPTICAL IN
This unit’s rear panel
Amplifier
Optical digital
audio cable
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
L
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
AV1
(TV)
VIDEO
RGB/S VIDEO

AV2
(EXT)
VIDEO
RGB/S VIDEO

OUT
COMMUNICATION
CAMERA
MAINMAIN
SUBSUB
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
COAXIAL IN
Amplifier
Coaxial cable
This unit’s rear panel
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 19 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Getting started
VQT3C73
20
Common Operations
1 Turn on the TV, then select the appropriate
AV input to suit the connections to this
unit.
2 Press [Í] on the remote control or [Í/I]
on this unit.
The Easy Setting will start at the initial power on after
purchasing this unit. (> 22)
When the indicator on this unit's display blinks, do not
turn off the unit or remove the media. Such action may
result in loss of the media contents.
When inserting the media, ensure that it is facing the right
way up.
Wipe off the dust or fingerprints from the discs before use.
(> 9)
Return discs to their cases or cartridges after use; this
helps to protect the discs against scratches and dust.
When removing the SD card, press on the centre of the
card and pull it straight out.
If you connect a Panasonic product with a USB connection
cable, setup screen may be displayed on the connected
equipment. For details, refer to the instructions for the
connected equipment.
To select a drive
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the media drive that you
operate.
Release disc protection
[BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM]
If the disc is protected when writing to the disc, release the
protection (> 74, Setting the protection).
The HOLD function deactivates all buttons on the unit and
remote control.
To cancel the HOLD function
Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN ] simultaneously until
“X HOLD” disappears.
Preparations
Turning on this unit
TIME SLIP
PROG/CHECK
STATUS
DIRECT TV REC
AUDIO
-10s +60s
REC MODE EXT LINK
REC
TEXT STTL
CHAPTER
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
G
U
I
D
E
RETURN
PLAY/x1.3
PAUSE
PAUSE LIVE TV
STOP
SLOW/SEARCH
SKIP
CH
PAGE
SELECT
INPUT
CH
AV
TV
DRIVE
SELECT
DEL
EXIT
OK
OPTION
MANUAL SKIP
VOL
0
2
abc
5
jkl
8
tuv
1
4
ghi
7
qrs
p
3
def
6
mno
9
xyz
w
INPUT
REWIND LIVE TV
TV operation
area (> 98)
Inserting or removing a media
HOLD function
Press and hold [OK] and
[RETURN ]
simultaneously until
“X HOLD” appears on
the unit’s display.
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on
the main unit to open the tray
and insert a disc.
SD card
USB memory
Unit’s display
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 20 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Getting started
VQT3C73
21
This unit is basically operated via the following method by
using the remote control.
To select and enter
Operating method can also be confirmed on the screen.
Available functions and buttons used are displayed on each
screen.
Selecting screen for each operation is displayed when the
media is inserted, and you can access the operation screen
easily.
e.g., [USB]
Display items differ depending on what is recorded in each
media.
If the menu screen is not displayed, display it by
performing the following operation.
1 While stopped
Press [OPTION].
2 Select “Drive Select”, then press [OK].
3 Select the media, then press [OK].
Menu screen for each media appears.
You can easily access the desired functions via the
FUNCTION MENU.
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Select the item, then press [OK].
Repeat step 2 if necessary.
Selectable items will change depending on the type and status of the
media.
Basic operation
To return to the previous screen
Press
To exit the screen
Press
Display navigation
Menu screen
OK OK
Select Enter
RETURN
EXIT
Page
CopySelect
OPTION
05.01
08.01
10.01
03.02
PLAY
RETURN
PHOTO / MUSIC
KD2A01.01
01.01
02.01
Delete
Page Up
Page Down
USB
OK
RETURN
USB device is inserted.
View Photos
Play Video
Play / Copy Music ( MP3 )
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Copy New Photos
FUNCTION MENU screen
Playback Contents
Video (> 40)
Photo (> 60)
Music (> 66)
TV Guide (> 29, 35)
Timer Recording (> 36)
Copy
Copy Video (> 54)
Copy Video (AVCHD) to DVD-R (> 58)
Network
Home Network (DLNA) (> 81)
Internet Content (> 77)
View (> 27)
“View” is displayed when this unit is connected with the TV
that supports “HDAVI Control 2” or later. (> 78)
Others
Ext Link Standby (> 71)
Flexible Recording via AV input (> 70)
BD-Video Data Management (> 74)
Setup (> 84)
Drive Select
Disc / SD Card / USB
FUNCTION MENU
Drive Select
OK
RETURN
Titles recorded to the HDD can be viewed,
edited, or deleted.
Blu-ray
Timer Recording
Copy
Others
Disc / SD Card / USB
Network
Playback Contents
TV Guide
HDD
Video
Photo
Music
View
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 21 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Getting started
VQT3C73
22
Settings
1 Turn on the TV, then select the
appropriate AV input to suit the
connections to this unit.
2 Press [Í] to turn the unit on. (> 20)
3 Select the language.
When using a Single cable router
1 Press [RETURN ] after selecting the
language.
2 Go to page 26, step 1.
4 Follow the on-screen instructions and
make the following settings.
Country
Number of cables to connect
Search mode
Auto Setup starts.
These operations (Searching Satellite and Searching
Channels) may take some time.
After tuning has been completed, clock will be set
automatically.
If the clock setting screen appears, set the time
manually (> 95, Clock).
5 Set “Power Save” to “On”, “On Timer”
or “Off”, then press [OK].
When “Easy Setting has been completed.” appears,
Easy Setting is complete.
To stop partway
Press [RETURN ].
To restart set up
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Select “Setup” in “Others”, then press [OK].
3 Select “Auto Setup” in “DVB Tuning”, then press [OK].
¾ If the TV aspect setting screen appears (> 91, TV
Aspect)
¾ To confirm that channels have been tuned correctly
(> 27, Using Channel List)
Easy Setting
Auto Setup
RETURN
Satellite
Progress
This will take up to 40 minutes.
Checking LNB1
Satellite
LNB in 1 LNB in 2
Press RETURN to skip Satellite installation
Searching Satellite
Checking... Checking...
On It will go into the Power Save in Standby
mode.
On Timer Set the start and stop time and then
press [OK].
“Power Save in Standby” is activated
when the set time comes.
Off It is possible to start quickly from the
standby mode. (Quick Start mode)
If you use Home Network ( DLNA )
Server function (> 94), select “Off”.
This function is not available with other
settings.
Power Save in Standby
From To
Power Save
0 6
On
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 22 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Getting started
VQT3C73
23
After completing “Easy Setting”, you can continue with
“Network Easy Setting”.
Select “Wired” or “Wireless”, then press
[OK].
e.g., [BST800]
1 Follow the on-screen instructions and
make the following settings.
Network Easy Setting ( Home Network Connection
Check )
Home Network ( DLNA ) Server function
Network Easy Setting ( Internet Connection Test )
This screen appears, Setup is complete.
2 Press [OK].
¾ When you experience problems with settings (> 24)
Before beginning wireless connection setup
Obtain your Network name (SSID
§1
).
If your wireless connection is encrypted please be sure
that you know your encryption key.
[BST700] [BST701] If “Wireless LAN Adaptor is not
connected.” is displayed, check that the Wireless LAN
Adaptor is fully inserted. Alternatively, disconnect and
reconnect it. If there is still no change in the display,
consult your dealer for advice.
Select “Search for wireless network” or
“WPS (PUSH button)” and then follow the
on-screen instructions and make the
settings.
Search for wireless network:
When you select “Search for wireless network”, the
available wireless networks will be displayed. Select your
network name and press [OK].
If your Network name is not displayed search again by
pressing the “Red” button on the remote control.
Stealth SSID will not be displayed when you select
“Search for wireless network”. Enter Manually by using
“Wireless Settings”. (> 93)
If your wireless network is encrypted, Encryption Key Input
Screen will be displayed.
Input the encryption key of your network.
WPS (PUSH button):
If your Wireless router supports WPS
(PUSH button), you can easily
perform the settings by pressing
WPS button on it.
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a
standard that facilitates settings
relating to the connection and
security of wireless LAN devices.
1 Press WPS button or
corresponding button of Wireless router until the lamp
starts flashing.
For details, refer to the operating instruction of Wireless
router.
2 Press [OK].
§1
An SSID (Service Set IDentification) is a name used by
wireless LAN to identify a particular network.
Transmission is possible if the SSID matches for both
devices.
§2
Wi-Fi Protected Setup-compatible Wireless router may
have the mark.
Network Easy Setting
“Wired” connection
OK
RETURN
Network Easy Setting
Settings and tests for connection required
for home network and the Internet will be
conducted.
First, please select a connection mode.
LAN cable connection:
Connect a LAN cable to the unit and select “Wired”.
Wireless LAN connection:
Select “Wireless”.
Current setting : Wired
Wired
Wireless
OK
RETURN
Network Easy Setting
Network Easy Setting have been finished.
Press OK.
“Wireless” connection
Wireless Settings
Select a connection method to wireless access point.
Please refer to the operating instructions of your wireless
access point about connection methods.
Search for wireless network
WPS (PUSH button)
2
e.g.,
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 23 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Getting started
VQT3C73
24
Settings
Wireless Settings
If there is no problem, the following screen is displayed.
If there is any problem, the following message is
displayed on the screen.
Network Easy Setting ( Home Network
Connection Check )
If there is no problem, the following screen is displayed.
e.g., “Wireless” connection
If there is any problem, the following message is
displayed on the screen.
When you experience problems with
settings
Display Check the following
A conflict with other
devices occurred.
Please wait a few moments,
and then try again.
A time out error
occurred.
Setting of the Wireless router
for MAC Address etc.
The signal may be weak.
[BST 700] [BST701] Using the
USB extension cable supplied
with the Wireless LAN
Adaptor, adjust the position of
the Wireless LAN Adaptor.
The SSID and the encryption
key of the Wireless router.
Please wait a few moments,
and then try again.
An authentication
error or a time out
error occurred.
A device error
occurred.
[BST700] [ BST701] Connection
of Wireless LAN Adaptor
If there is no improvement in
symptom, contact your dealer.
OK
Wireless Settings
Complete.
Network name
(SSID)
:
Wireless type :
Authentication type :
Encryption type :
Reception
Press OK to check network connection.
For better performance of Home Network (DLNA), it is
recommended using a wireless access point
compatible with 802.11n (5GHz).
:
Display
Check the
following
1. LAN cable
connection or
Wireless setting:
“Fail
Connection of
the LAN cables
(> 16)
Settings of the
hub and router
2. IP address setting: Fail”
3. Connection to
gateway:
“Fail
1. LAN cable
connection or
Wireless setting:
“Pass”
Connection and
settings of the
hub and router
Settings of “IP
Address / DNS
Settings”
(> 93)
2. IP address setting: Fail”
3. Connection to
gateway:
“Fail
1. LAN cable
connection or
Wireless setting:
“Pass”
2. IP address setting: Pass
3. Connection to
gateway:
“Fail
1. LAN cable
connection or
Wireless setting:
“Pass”
2. IP address setting: Home
network
available”
3. Connection to
gateway:
“Fail
OK
Network Easy Setting ( Home Network Connection Check )
Completed.
Network connection check has finished.
Press OK.
1. Wireless setting : Pass
2. IP address setting : Pass
3. Connection to gateway : Pass
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 24 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Getting started
VQT3C73
25
Network Easy Setting ( Internet
Connection Test )
If there is no problem, the following screen is displayed.
If there is any problem, the following message is
displayed on the screen.
To restart Network Easy Setting
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Select “Setup” in “Others”, then press [OK].
3 Select “Network Easy Setting” in “Network”, then press
[OK].
To redo settings individually
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Select “Setup” in “Others”, then press [OK].
3 Select “Network Settings” in “Network”, then press [OK].
4 Select “IP Address / DNS Settings” (> 93) or “Proxy
Server Settings” (> 93), then press [OK].
Check security before using Home Network ( DLNA )
Server function
If you set “Home Network ( DLNA ) Server function” to “On”,
all connected devices on the same network can access this
unit. Ensure that the router for your home network has
adequate security system to prevent unauthorized access.
Refer to the operating instructions of the hub or router.
Home Network ( DLNA ) Server function setting can be set only when
you selected “Off” for “Power Save in Standby” in “Easy Setting”. (> 22,
step 5)
Even if you set “Home Network ( DLNA ) Server function” to “Off”, it is
possible to set to “On” later. (> 94)
You can perform this setup anytime by selecting “Network Easy Setting”
in the Setup menu. (> 93)
You can redo these settings individually using “Network Settings”.
(> 93)
Do not use this unit to connect to any wireless network for which you do
not have usage rights.
During automatic searches in a wireless network environment, wireless
networks (SSID) for which you do not have usage rights may be
displayed; however, using these networks may be regarded as illegal
access.
After performing network settings on this unit, the settings (encryption
level, etc.) of the Wireless router might change. When you have trouble
getting online on your PC, perform the network settings on your PC in
accordance with the settings of Wireless router.
Please be aware that connecting to a network without encryption may
result in the content of the communication being illegitimately viewed by
a third party, or the leaking of data such as personal or secret
information.
Display Check the following
Cannot find the
server. (B019)
Primary DNS” and “Secondary
DNS” settings of “IP Address /
DNS Settings” (> 93)
No connection
could be made to
the server. (B020)
The server may be busy or the
service may have been
suspended. Please wait a few
moments, and then try again.
Settings of “Proxy Server
Settings” (> 93) and the router
OK
Network Easy Setting (Internet Connection Test)
Completed.
Press OK.
Network connection check has finished.
Internet functions are available.
- Connection to the internet : Pass
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 25 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Getting started
VQT3C73
26
Settings
When a single cable router is used, it is necessary to
change the settings of this unit and then run Auto Setup.
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Select “Setup” in “Others”, then press
[OK].
3 Select “Antenna System” in “DVB
Tuning”.
4 Press [2, 1] to select “Single Cable”.
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Auto Setup”,
then press [OK].
1 Select “Yes”, then press [OK].
2 Select the country, then press [OK].
6 Make the settings of user band.
For details, read the manual of the single cable
router, etc.
7 Select “Start Auto Setup”, then press
[OK].
8 Select the search mode, then press
[OK].
Auto Setup starts.
These operations (Searching Satellite and Searching
Channels) may take some time.
After tuning has been completed, clock will be set
automatically.
If the clock setting screen appears, set the time
manually (> 95, Clock).
To set Power Save settings
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Select “Setup” in “Others”, then press [OK].
3 Select “Standby Settings” in “Others”, then press [OK].
4 Select “Power Save in Standby”, then press [OK].
5 Refer to page 22, step 5.
To start Network Easy Setting
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Select “Setup” in “Others”, then press [OK].
3 Select “Network Easy Setting” in “Network”, then press
[OK].
4 Refer to page 23.
Auto Setup method when using
a single cable router
Setup
OK
RETURN
DVB Tuning
HDD / Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
Network
Others
RETURN
DVB Tuning
Favourites Edit
Channel List
Auto Setup
Manual Tuning
Update Channel List
Preferred Language
Signal Condition
Antenna System
Single Cable
LNB Configuration
User Band You can set C1 to C8. Set to a User
Band not used by any other device.
When only one User Band of the
Router is assigned, set “Tuner 2” side
to “Off”. Note that you will not be able
to record 2 programmes
simultaneously or watch TV during
recording.
User Band
Frequency
Set the User Band Frequency with
number buttons.
User Band
PIN
If the single cable router requires a PIN
to access an user band, enter the PIN.
User Band Settings
OK
Select
RETURN
Start Auto Setup
Please confirm user band settings before starting Auto Setup.
Tuner 1
User Band
User Band Frequency
User Band PIN
Tuner 2
User Band
User Band Frequency
User Band PIN
C1
1284 MHz (preset: 1284 MHz)
Off
C2
1400 MHz (preset: 1400 MHz)
Off
Auto Setup
RETURN
Satellite
Progress
This will take up to 40 minutes.
Checking LNB1
Satellite
Tuner 1 Tuner 2
Press RETURN to skip Satellite installation
Searching Satellite
Checking... Checking...
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 26 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Watching broadcasts
VQT3C73
27
Watching broadcasts
Watching
broadcasts
If encrypted channels do not appear
To watch an encrypted broadcast, insert the CI module into
the CI slot. (> 12)
Depending on the CI module, a PIN may be demanded. If
prompted to enter a PIN code, enter the set PIN code with
the number buttons.
Set according to the CI module. (> 92, Common Interface)
¾ Enjoying 3D video (> 46)
3D programmes can be played back when this unit is connected to a 3D
compatible TV using an HDMI cable.
Change the setting if you cannot view 3D compatible programmes in 3D.
The length of time the channel information is displayed can be changed.
(> 90, On-Screen Information)
Depending on the settings of “Recording for Encrypted Channel” (> 87),
it may not be possible to view certain programmes. (> 34, Notes for
recording of an encrypted broadcast)
You can select from the list of channel names.
After performing step (> left)
1 Press [OK].
To change the category, press the “Red” button.
To sort the channel, press the “Blue” button.
2 Select the channel, then press [OK].
To skip unwanted channels
The channel is skipped next time you select the channel.
1 While watching the broadcast to skip, press [DEL].
2Press [OK].
You can also select the skipped channel with the number buttons.
When you want to restore the skipped channel, edit the Channel
List. (> 85)
¾ To edit the Channel List (> 85, Channel List)
Selection of channel is made easy by creating a Favourite of the
channels. (> 84, Favourites Edit)
Press [INPUT SELECT] and
select “TV”, then press [OK].
Press [CH WX] to select the
channel.
Everytime you change the channel, channel
information appears automatically.
Unit’s display;
You can also select the channel with the number
buttons.
TIME SLIP
PROG/CHECK
STATUS
DIRECT TV REC
AUDIO
-10s +60s
REC MODE EXT LINK
REC
TEXT STTL
CHAPTER
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
G
U
I
D
E
RETURN
PLAY/x1.3
PAUSE
PAUSE LIVE TV
STOP
SLOW/SEARCH
SKIP
CH
PAGE
SELECT
INPUT
CH
AV
TV
DRIVE
SELECT
DEL
EXIT
OK
OPTION
MANUAL SKIP
VOL
0
2
abc
5
jkl
8
tuv
1
4
ghi
7
qrs
p
3
def
6
mno
9
xyz
w
INPUT
REWIND LIVE TV
TV
AV2
AV1
Input Selection
RETURN
Change
Select
e.g., Side by side programme
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Select “3D Settings”, then press [OK].
3 Select “Side by side” in “Signal
Format”, then press [OK].
Using Channel List
All DVB Channels
Select
View
RETURN
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Category 123/ABC
Sorting 123...
Page up
Page down
Channel names
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 27 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Watching broadcasts
VQT3C73
28
Watching broadcasts
Press [STATUS ].
1 Current Category
2 Encrypted broadcast
3 Subtitle
4 Te le t e x t
5 Multiple audio/Sub Channel
6 Set timer (> 37)
To show detailed information
Press [STATUS ] again.
To hide the information screen
Press [EXIT].
To change Category
Press the “Blue” button.
Register your favourite channels
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Select “Digital TV Menu”, then press [OK].
3 Select “Favourites Edit, then press [OK].
4 Refer to page 84 (Favourites Edit).
To switch between the current programme and the next
programme
Press [2, 1].
To switch to another channel
Press [3, 4], then press [OK].
When “ appears in channel information (> left)
Press [STTL ].
To hide subtitle
Press [STTL ].
To change subtitle language
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Select “Subtitle Language” in “Digital TV Menu”, then
press [OK].
3 Select the desired language.
Press [EXIT] to exit the screen.
Some subtitle content is displayed using Teletext. (> below)
Press [AUDIO].
Audio will switch according to the contents of the
programme every time it is pressed.
When “ appears in channel information (> left)
Press [TEXT ].
To select the page or access to certain topic areas and
navigation
Use [3, 4, 2, 1], number buttons or colour buttons, etc.
according to on-screen instructions.
Some functions of Teletext are deactivated during recording.
You can change the display mode (> 90, Teletext).
You can switch the screen mode. (> 98)
Channel information
1
All DVB Channels
10:30
NEWS
9:00 - 11:00
Now
Dolby DEncrypted
Set timer
Change category

e.g.,
Operations while watching
broadcast
To show subtitle
Switching audio
To sho w Te letex t
Aspect
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 28 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Watching broadcasts
VQT3C73
29
When a programme includes audio signals and subtitle etc.,
you can select signals.
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Select “Digital TV Menu”, then press [OK].
3 Select “Multi Audio”,Sub Channel” or
“Subtitle Language”, then press [OK].
4 Select the item.
1 Press [GUIDE].
Each press switches the appearance.
2 Select the programme, then press [OK].
3 Select “View”, then press [OK].
Page up/down
Press [CH WX].
To view a programme list for another day
Press the “Red” button (Previous) or the “Green” button
(Next).
¾ Timer Recording using the TV Guide System (> 35)
Selection of channel is made easy by creating a Favourite of the
channels you watch often. (> 84, Favourites Edit)
Some broadcast may not send programme information.
While displaying TV Guide screen
Press [STATUS ].
Additional information is available for these programmes.
To select content in the broadcast
Using TV Guide system
Landscape
SAT, 01.01.2011
SAT 01.01.2011 08:05
All DVB Channels
All Types
OPTION
Page Down
Page Up
+24 hours Prog. Type Category
Time:
Info
Select Channel
Select Programme
OK
RETURN
Portrait/Landscape
8:00 - 8:45
8:00 8:30 9:00 9:30 10:00
Portrait
SAT, 01.01.2011
All DVB Channels
All Types
OPTION
Page Down
+24 hours Prog. Type Category
Info
Select Programme
Select Channel
OK
RETURN
Portrait/Landscape
SAT 01.01.2011 08:05
8:00 - 8:45
8:45 - 11:00
11:00 - 11:45
11:45 - 13:00
13:00 - 13:30
13:30 - 14:00
14:00 - 15:00
15:00 - 17:00
Landscape view
Portrait view
Selection Screen SAT 01.01.2011 8:05
Timer Rec Set
Timer Rec Edit
Timer Rec Cancel
View
OK
RETURN
SAT 01.01.2011
8:00 - 8:45
To see programme information
(Programmes with the symbol)
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 29 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Watching broadcasts
VQT3C73
30
Watching broadcasts
This unit temporarily saves a live TV programme you are
watching with this unit’s tuner on HDD and you can use the
following functions.
Select the HDD drive to perform these functions correctly.
1 While watching TV
(REWIND]LIVE]TV)
Press [SLOW/SEARCH 6] to rewind.
“REWIND LIVE TV” appears on the unit’s display.
(PAUSE]LIVE]TV)
Press [PAUSE ;] to pause.
PAUSE LIVE TV” appears on the unit’s display.
2 When you want to resume
Press [PLAY/a1.3 1].
You can perform search or Quick View, etc.
If temporary save stops (> right), playback will be
performed by that point.
While pausing or rewinding a broadcast:
Press [STATUS ].
Press [STATUS ] again.
While pausing a programme via external input:
Press [STATUS ].
1 The time that you can rewind the live programme.
2 The amount of time temporarily saved on HDD
(maximum: 1.5 hours).
3 The time of the current playback position.
4 The time which is 1.5 hours after PAUSE LIVE TV or
REWIND LIVE TV started.
After 1.5 hours from PAUSE LIVE TV or REWIND LIVE
TV started, current time is displayed.
To stop REWIND LIVE TV or PAUSE LIVE TV
1Press [STOP].
2 Select “Yes”, then press [OK].
To hide the display information
Press [EXIT].
Temporary save stops in the following cases:
– When switching to other channels or other screen
– When recording of the watching programme is started
– When timer recording is started
– When performing PAUSE LIVE TV or REWIND LIVE TV for more than
8 hours (This may vary depending on the HDD free space.)
These functions do not work in the following cases:
– When the clock is not set
– When set clock manually (Copy protected title (Copying is prohibited)
only) (> 13)
– While recording 2 programmes simultaneously
– While copying
– While watching a programme being recorded
– When a radio programme is selected
– While watching an encrypted programme
(REWIND]LIVE]TV) When “REWIND LIVE TV” is set to Off” (> 87)
(PAUSE]LIVE]TV) When a timer recording via external input is started
while watching a programme via external input
(PAUSE]LIVE]TV) You can operate this unit with the TV remote control by
using VIERA Link (> 78).
Refer to the TV operating instructions for operation.
(PAUSE]LIVE]TV) When you connect the TV with a HDMI cable and a 21-
pin Scart cable, it is possible to pause programmes that cannot be
received with the tuner of this unit. (> 17)
REWIND LIVE TV/PAUSE LIVE
TV
REWIND LIVE TV
You can rewind live TV programme up to 1.5 hours
before as long as temporary save has not been stopped.
PAUSE LIVE TV
You can pause live TV programme and restart watching
from the paused position.
PAUSE LIVE TV also works when watching a
programme via external input.
Pause
8:05 9:35
8:10
Display information
Pause
8:05 9:35
8:50
6:53:12 01.01.2011
Play
6:53.50
6:53:12 01.01.2011
Play
6:53.50
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 30 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Recording
VQT3C73
31
Recording TV programmes
Recording
¾ About CI Plus restriction (> 13)
¾ Notes for recording of an encrypted broadcast (> 34)
This operation will only record to HDD.
Press [INPUT SELECT] and
select “TV”, then press [OK].
Press [CH WX] to select the
channel.
You can also select the channel with the number
buttons or Channel List (> 27).
TIME SLIP
PROG/CHECK
STATUS
DIRECT TV REC
AUDIO
-10s +60s
REC MODE EXT LINK
REC
TEXT STTL
CHAPTER
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
G
U
I
D
E
RETURN
PLAY/x1.3
PAUSE
PAUSE LIVE TV
STOP
SLOW/SEARCH
SKIP
CH
PAGE
SELECT
INPUT
CH
AV
TV
DRIVE
SELECT
DEL
EXIT
OK
OPTION
MANUAL SKIP
VOL
0
2
abc
5
jkl
8
tuv
1
4
ghi
7
qrs
p
3
def
6
mno
9
xyz
w
INPUT
REWIND LIVE TV
Press [REC MODE] and select
the conversion mode, then
press [OK].
This unit will record the programmes in DR mode
once, and then automatically convert to the
selected recording mode while this unit is in
standby.
¾ Recording mode (> 6)
¾ Recording modes and approximate recording
times (> 113)
The recorded title will be kept in DR mode
without any conversion when “Off (DR)” is
selected.
The conversion mode set here is inherited as an
initial value for the next recording or timer
recording.
If the confirmation message appears
Press [OK].
Press [REC ¥].
Recording starts.
Select the “Automatic Stop”,
then press [OK].
One touch recording (OTR)
Recording stops automatically when the
programme ends.
You can also select “Recording Time” or
“Continuous recording”. (> 32)
HG
HX
HE
HL
HM
XP
SP
LP
EP
Off (DR)
Conversion Mode Setting
OK
RETURN
Remain: (DR)m
h
High
Definition
Data Size
Large
Small
Large
Small
Standard
Definition
REC1
“REC1” or “REC2” will light
Unit’s display
Automatic Stop at 8:45
REC1/OTR
Recording Time
Continuous recording
30 min
8:00 - 8:45
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 31 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Recording
VQT3C73
32
Recording TV programmes
To set the recording time
1 Select “Recording Time” or “Continuous recording” in
step on page 31.
2 Press [OK].
¾ Notes for recording of an encrypted broadcast (> 34)
¾ To convert the recording mode after recording in DR
mode (> 50)
One recording will terminate when simultaneous recording is being done
and timer recording starts.
When “Automatic Standby after OTR” is set to “On” (> 95), this unit is
turned to standby mode if this unit is not operated for approximately
5 minutes after completing “Automatic Stop” or “Recording Time”.
The SD quality programme can not be converted to HD quality.
Recording mode conversion
Conversion will be performed after the unit is turned off. It
will take about the same time as the recorded duration.
¾ To confirm whether the conversion is completed
(> 50)
¾ To cancel a conversion (> 50, To cancel a “During
standby” conversion)
When a programme is recorded in encrypted form, conversion will
not start until decryption has finished. (> 34)
The title before conversion (the title recorded in DR mode) will be
deleted once the conversion is completed.
When the HDD does not have enough remaining space, conversion
will not start.
This function is stopped when this unit is turned on. Conversion will
start from the beginning again once the unit is turned off.
The conversion will not start if the timer recording is scheduled within
the time required for the conversion.
When converted, audio track, multi channel audio, audio language
and subtitle will be converted with the same settings as at the start of
recording.
Teletext will not be recorded.
Press [STATUS ].
Press [CH WX].
Press [INPUT SELECT].
It is necessary to display the recording programme onto the
TV screen to perform operations such as pause.
Press [CH WX] or [INPUT SELECT] to select
the recording channel.
You can play the recording title from the beginning or the
titles previously recorded to the HDD.
1 While recording
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
[ is displayed on the recording programme.
2 Select the title, then press [OK].
Recording
Time
You can set the length of recording
time from 30 minutes to 4 hours.
Select the recording time.
You can also set the time with
[REC ¥].
Continuous
recording
The recording is continued until you
press [STOP ].
Operation during Recording
To check the recording programme
To switch the Channel
To switch the Input
To display the recording programme
on the TV
Simultaneous rec and play
e.g., While recording 2 programmes simultaneously
REC2
HDD
REC1/OTR AUTO
Recording programme displayed on
the TV
Recording programme not displayed
on the TV
Time Remaining 45:54 (DR)
HDD
Page
Select
Grouped Titles VIDEO
OPTION
Start Time
Prog.Type:
Rec time
PLAY
RETURN
PHOTO / MUSIC
Social/Economic
Sport Video (AVCHD)MovieNot Viewed
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
Channel Date Title Name Titles
All
Delete
Page Up
Page Down
Movie
9:00
0:01(DR)
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 32 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Recording
VQT3C73
33
Press [STOP ].
When recording 1 programme
If the following screen appears
Select “Yes”, then press [OK].
When recording 2 programmes
If the following screen appears
1 Select the programme, then press [OK].
2 Select “Yes”, then press [OK].
It is necessary to display the programme you want to pause
on the TV. (> 32, To display the recording programme on
the TV)
Press [PAUSE ;].
Press again to restart recording.
(A title is not split into separate titles.)
If paused while recording, the paused part may become a still picture for
a moment during playback of that programme.
While recording
Record another programme with steps
on page 31.
Either of programmes is necessary to be recorded from this unit’s tuner.
2 programme simultaneous recording is not possible in the following
conditions:
While executing “Flexible Recording via AV input” to the disc
– While high speed copying
Channel or input cannot be switched except to the recording
programmes.
You can immediately start recording the watching
programme on the TV without switching the channels on this
unit by using VIERA Link or Q Link (> 78).
Recording mode will be the mode that was selected for the
previous recording. (> 31, step )
Press [¥ DIRECT TV REC] and hold for
about 1 second.
To stop recording partway
Press [STOP ].
You can also operate this unit with the TV remote control. Refer to the
TV operating instructions for operation.
When you connect the TV with a 21-pin Scart cable (> 17), it is possible
to record programmes that cannot be received with the tuner of this unit.
(Recording mode: XP, SP, LP, EP)
If you switch TV channels while recording broadcasting using the TV’s
tuner, Direct TV Recording stops.
(Q]Link) During Ext Link Standby mode or recording, Direct TV
Recording is unavailable. (> 71)
To stop recording
To pause recording
Stop Recording
Yes
No
Recording of this programme is in progress.
Stop this recording ?
OK
RETURN
1
Stop Recording
2 recordings are in progress.
Which recording would you like to stop ?
OK
RETURN
1
2
To perform 2 programmes
simultaneous recording
Direct TV Recording
REC1
REC2
Unit’s display
“REC1” and “REC2” will light
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 33 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Recording
VQT3C73
34
Recording TV programmes
This unit allows you to record/view/play an encrypted
programme by decryption using a supporting CI module.
The recording of encrypted broadcasts differs according to
the “Recording for Encrypted Channel” (> 87) settings as
follows.
§
Depending on the specifications of the CI module, the
broadcast may be recorded in the encrypted form.
(> below)
Two programmes (e.g., “A” and “B”) which need the same CI
module for decryption will be recorded/viewed/played as
follows:
When “Automatic” is selected
When “Decrypt Recording” is selected
When “Encrypt Recording” is selected
Programmes recorded in encrypted form ( ) have the
following restrictions:
The encrypted title can be played back, but it does not
mean that it is decrypted and saved in the decrypted form.
Depending on the programme, it may not be possible to
playback/decrypt after recording.
There are restrictions on the playback and editing of
encrypted programmes.
To copy an encrypted programme, decryption must be
performed.
Decryption is performed when the unit is turned off. It will
take about the same time as the recorded duration.
“COPY” on the unit's display remains lighted during
decryption.
¾ It is also possible to decrypt manually (> 51)
To decrypt, insert the CI module into the CI slot (> 12). During
decryption, do not remove the CI module from this unit.
The title before decryption will be deleted once decryption is completed.
When the HDD does not have enough remaining space, decryption will
not start.
This function is stopped when this unit is turned on. Decryption will start
from the beginning again once the unit is turned off.
The decryption will not start if the timer recording is scheduled within the
time required for the decryption.
When a decryption fails, the screen icon ( ) is changed to “ .
Notes for recording of an
encrypted broadcast
Recording of encrypted broadcast
Supporting CI
module is inserted
Supporting CI
module is not
inserted
Automatic Record (Decrypted)
§
Record (Encrypted)
Decrypt
Recording
Record (Decrypted) Recording impossible
Encrypt
Recording
Record (Encrypted) Record (Encrypted)
2 encrypted programmes simultaneous
recording/viewing/playing
Programme “A” “B”
While recording programme
“A”, start recording
programme “B”.
Record
(Decrypted)
Record
(Encrypted)
While viewing/playing
programme “A”, start timer
recording programme “B”.
Viewing/
playing
possible
Record
(Encrypted)
While recording programme
“A”, view/play programme
“B”.
Record
(Decrypted)
Viewing/
playing
impossible
Programme “A” “B”
While recording programme
“A”, start recording
programme “B”.
Record
(Decrypted)
Recording
impossible
While viewing/playing
programme “A”, start timer
recording programme “B”.
Viewing/
playing
impossible
Record
(Decrypted)
While recording programme
“A”, view/play programme
“B”.
Record
(Decrypted)
Viewing/
playing
impossible
Programme “A” “B”
While recording programme
“A”, start recording
programme “B”.
Record
(Encrypted)
Record
(Encrypted)
While viewing/playing
programme “A”, start timer
recording programme “B”.
Viewing/
playing
possible
Record
(Encrypted)
While recording programme
“A”, view/play programme
“B”.
Record
(Encrypted)
Viewing/
playing
possible
Encrypted titles
Decryption
COPY
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 34 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Recording
VQT3C73
35
Timer recording
To cancel a timer recording on the TV Guide screen
1 Select “Timer Rec Cancel”, then press [OK] in step .
(“F” in the TV Guide disappears)
2 Select “Yes”, then press [OK].
To modify the timer recording on the TV Guide screen
1 Select “Timer Rec Edit”, then press [OK] in step .
2 Go to step 3 on page 36.
¾ About CI Plus restriction (> 13)
¾ Using TV Guide system (> 29)
¾ Notes for recording of an encrypted broadcast (> 34)
When timer recording from the external equipment, use manually
programming timer recording. (> 36)
You can enter up to 64 programmes up to a month in advance.
(Each daily or weekly programme is counted as one programme.)
The receipt of the TV Guide system data is only possible via the aerial
input of this unit. The receipt of the TV Guide data via Set Top Box is not
possible.
You can set the start and finish time to make the timer recording work
successfully. (> 87, Timer Record Start Buffer, Timer Record Stop
Buffer)
Some broadcast may not send programme information.
Set the timer recording manually (> 36).
This operation will only record to HDD.
Press [GUIDE].
Select the programme, then
press [OK].
When the programme currently broadcasting is
selected, following screen is displayed.
Select “Timer Rec Set”, then press [OK].
TIME SLIP
PROG/CHECK
STATUS
DIRECT TV REC
AUDIO
-10s +60s
REC MODE EXT LINK
REC
TEXT STTL
CHAPTER
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
G
U
I
D
E
RETURN
PLAY/x1.3
PAUSE
PAUSE LIVE TV
STOP
SLOW/SEARCH
SKIP
CH
PAGE
SELECT
INPUT
CH
AV
TV
DRIVE
SELECT
DEL
EXIT
OK
OPTION
MANUAL SKIP
VOL
0
2
abc
5
jkl
8
tuv
1
4
ghi
7
qrs
p
3
def
6
mno
9
xyz
w
INPUT
REWIND LIVE TV
Landscape
SAT 01.01.2011
SAT 01.01.2011 08:05
All DVB Channels
All Types
OPTION
Page Down
Page Up
+24 hours Prog. Type Category
Time:
Info
Select Channel
Select Programme
OK
RETURN
Portrait/Landscape
8:00 - 8:45
8:00 8:30 9:00 9:30 10:00
Selection Screen SAT 01.01.2011 8:05
Timer Rec Set
Timer Rec Edit
Timer Rec Cancel
View
OK
RETURN
SAT 01.01.2011
8:00 - 8:45
Confirm the programme and
make corrections if necessary
using [3, 4, 2, 1].
(> 36, Timer recording options)
Press [OK].
The timer programme is stored and the timer icon
(red) is displayed.
Timer Recording SAT 01.01.2011 8:05
30:24 DR
Channel
1 SAT 01.01
Day/Date Stop
8:00 9:00
Start
RETURN
Category/
AV
Date/
Weekly
Title Name
DR OFF
Mode
OFF
Conv. Subtitles
OK
HDD
All DVB Channels
All Types
0
0 9:30 10:00
Timer icon
(red)
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 35 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Recording
VQT3C73
36
Timer recording
1 While displaying TV Guide screen
Press the “Yellow” button (Prog.Type) or
the “Blue” button (Category).
2 Select the item, then press [OK].
To return to the previous TV Guide list
Select “All Types” of the programme type or “All DVB
Channels of the Category in step 2.
Category and programme types may not be assigned correctly
depending on the programme information.
1 Press [PROG/CHECK].
2 Select “New Timer Programme”, then
press [OK].
3 Select the items and change the items.
(> right, Timer recording options)
4 Press [OK].
The timer programme is stored and the timer icon
(red) is displayed.
¾ To confirm and edit the timer programme (> 38)
You can enter up to 64 programmes up to a month in advance. (Each
daily or weekly programme is counted as one programme.)
When recording from the external equipment, “Mode (recording mode)”
is XP, SP, LP, EP or FR.
Select the items and change the items.
To search the programmes
Landscape
view
The unit displays programmes in grey
that do not belong to the selected
programme type.
Portrait view Only the selected programme types
are displayed.
Manually programming timer
recording
Channel Name
Schedule
Mode
Space
OK
RETURN
Page Up
Page Down
Turn
Timer Off
Total 0/64
Timer Recording
30:30 DRHDD SAT 01.01.2011 8:05
Delete
New Timer Programme
Info
Channel Name
Schedule
Mode
Space
Timer Recording
30:30 DRHDD SAT 01.01.2011 8:05
New Timer Programme
OK
Programme Name
SAT 01.01
8:00 - 9:00
DR
Check for available space on HDD, when the “!” is
displayed. (> 38)
Timer icon (red)
Timer recording options
Channel Press [3, 4].
You can select Category/AV with the
“Red” button to switch Favourites, AV
input, etc.
Day/Date Press [3, 4].
You can select “Date” or “Weekly” by
pressing the “Green” button.
Auto Renewal Recording
The unit will record the new programme
over the old one.
(Only daily/weekly timer recording)
Press the “Yellow” button a few
times.
“Renew : ON” is displayed.
Start/Stop Press [3, 4].
Press and hold [3, 4] to alter in
15-minute increments.
Mode/Conv. Press [3, 4].
(> 31, step )
Subtitles (Only when item other than “OFF” is
selected in “Conv.”)
Press [3, 4].
Title Name Select “Title Name, then press [OK].
(> 76, Entering text)
Timer Recording SAT 01.01.2011 8:05
30:24 DR
Channel
1 SAT 01.01
Day/Date Stop
8:00 9:00
Start
RETURN
Category/
AV
Date/
Weekly
Title Name
DR OFF
Mode
OFF
Conv. Subtitles
OK
HDD
e.g.,
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 36 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Recording
VQT3C73
37
You can make timer recording of the current or next
programme.
1 While watching a programme
Press [STATUS ].
2 Display the channel information of a
programme to record.
Switch the programme with [2, 1].
Switch the channel with [3, 4].
3 Press the “Yellow” button.
4 Go to step 3 on page 36.
You cannot changeChannel” and Day/Date”.
Press [STOP ].
When recording 1 programme
Select “Yes”, then press [OK].
When recording 2 programmes
1 Select the programme, then press [OK].
2 Select “Yes”, then press [OK].
If you have already set a daily/weekly timer recording, the recording will
start at the next scheduled time.
When recording except in DR mode, the audio language,
audio content and subtitle language will be selected
according to the following settings:
“Multi Audio” ofPreferred Language” (> 86)
“Audio for HG / HX / HE / HL / HM Recording” (> 90)
“Subtitles of “Preferred Language (> 86)
When recording except in DR mode, teletext will not be
recorded.
(Only when recording broadcast in other than DR mode)
This unit will record in the DR mode once, and then
convert to the selected mode automatically during standby.
If the title has not been decrypted, conversion will start
after decryption.
Depending on the state of the unit, playback may stop
when recording begins.
Even if you turn the unit off during the timer recording, the
recording is continued.
When you programme successive timer recordings to
start, about last 1 minute of earlier programme will not be
recorded.
[BST800] When “Pure Sound mode is activated, timer
recording does not start during playback of BD-Video,
DVD-Video or music CD. (> 87)
¾ Starting the timer recording while executing other
operation (> 108)
¾ About 2 programme simultaneous recording (> 33)
Timer recording from channel
information
To cancel recording when timer
recording has already begun
1
All DVB Channels
10:30
NEWS
9:00 - 11:00
Now
Dolby DEncrypted
Set timer
Change category
e.g.,
Stop Recording
Yes
No
Timer recording of this programme is in progress.
Stop this recording ?
OK
RETURN
1
Stop Recording
2 recordings are in progress.
Which recording would you like to stop ?
OK
RETURN
1
2
Notes on timer recording
Not recorded
Programme
Recorded Recorded
Programme
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 37 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Recording
VQT3C73
38
Timer recording
Press [PROG/CHECK].
To deactivate a timer programme
Select the programme, then press the “Red” button.
The timer iconF” (> right) will change from red to grey.
Press theRed” button again to activate timer recording
standby. (The timer icon “F” will change to red.)
To delete a timer programme
Select the programme, then press [DEL].
To edit a timer programme
1 Select the programme, then press [OK].
2 Change the timer recording options.
(> 36, Timer recording options)
To show programme information
Press [STATUS ].
To exit the timer recording list
Press [EXIT].
Failed programmes are deleted from the timer recording list at 4 a.m.
two days later.
To confirm and edit a timer
programme
Channel Name
Schedule
Mode
Space
OK
RETURN
Page Up
Page Down
Turn
Timer Off
Total 4/64
Timer Recording
30:30 DRHDD SAT 01.01.2011 08:05
Delete
Info
New Timer Programme
SAT 08.01
SAT 08.01
10:00 - 11:50
11:00 - 11:45
11:30 - 1:00
8:00 - 10:45
SAT 08.01
SAT 01.01
DR
HG
DR
DR
OK
OK
Icons
Recording mode (> 6)
Screen icons
F Red: Timer recording standby is activated.
Grey: Timer recording standby is deactivated.
[ Currently recording programme
A part or all of the programme will not be recorded
since the programme is overlapping.
The HDD is full.
Copy-protected programme
It was not recorded.
The programme did not complete recording because
of some reason.
Auto Renewal Recording is set (> 36).
(When “Recording for Encrypted Channel” is set to
“Decrypt Recording” only)
A part or all of the programme will not be recorded
since the encrypted programme is overlapping.
OK Displayed if the recording can fit in the remaining
space
>
(Date)
Daily or weekly timer programme is set. (up to a
maximum of one month from the present time)
! It may not be possible to record because:
there is not enough space left.
the number of possible titles has reached its
maximum. (> 111)
programmes are deactivated, etc.
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 38 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Playing back video
VQT3C73
39
Playing BD-Video or DVD-Video
Playing
back video
To display Pop-up Menu
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Press again to exit.
To d isplay Top Menu
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Select “Playback Menu”, then press [OK].
3 Select “Top Menu”, then press [OK].
If the Top menu is not displayed
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
¾ Enjoying 3D video (> 46)
[BD-V] You cannot playback while recording from external equipment.
Also, playback stops when the timer recording starts from external
equipment.
[BD-V]
Preparation
1 Perform network connection and settings. (> 16, 23, 93)
2 Insert a disc.
For the playback method, refer to the
instructions for the disc.
For the playback method, refer to the
instructions for the disc.
When the secondary video does not display
Turn the “Video” and “Soundtrack” to “On” in the “Secondary
Video” in the “Signal Type” in the Disc menu. (> 82)
The usable functions and the operating method may vary with each disc,
please refer to the instructions on the disc and/or visit their website.
When the BD-Live data cannot be downloaded due to a lack of storage
capacity, it is necessary to delete existing download data. (> 75, Delete
BD-Video data)
Some BD-Live content available on the Blu-ray discs may require an
Internet account to be created in order to access the BD-Live content.
Follow the screen display or instruction manual of the disc for
information on acquiring an account.
“BD-Live” may need to be changed for certain discs (> 87, BD-Live).
When discs supporting BD-Live are played back, the player or disc IDs
may be sent to the content provider via the Internet.
During search, quick view, slow-motion or frame-by-frame, only the
primary video is displayed.
When “BD-Video Secondary Audio” is set to “Off”, secondary audio will
not be played ( > 90).
Insert a disc.
Play starts from the point specified by the disc.
Select the item, then press
[OK].
Some items can also be selected using the
number buttons.
Playback starts.
TIME SLIP
PROG/CHECK
STATUS
DIRECT TV REC
AUDIO
-10s +60s
REC MODE EXT LINK
REC
TEXT STTL
CHAPTER
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
G
U
I
D
E
RETURN
PLAY/x1.3
PAUSE
PAUSE LIVE TV
STOP
SLOW/SEARCH
SKIP
CH
PAGE
SELECT
INPUT
CH
AV
TV
DRIVE
SELECT
DEL
EXIT
OK
OPTION
MANUAL SKIP
VOL
0
2
abc
5
jkl
8
tuv
1
4
ghi
7
qrs
p
3
def
6
mno
9
xyz
w
REWIND LIVE TV
INPUT
Enjoying BD-Live or picture-in-
picture in BD-Video
Enjoying BD-Live discs with Internet
BD-Live allows you to enjoy more functions
such as subtitles, exclusive images and
online games by connecting this unit to the
Internet. Since most of the BD-Live
compatible discs are played back using the
BD-Live function, additional contents are
required to be downloaded into the HDD.
(> 117, Local storage)
Playing picture-in-picture
Secondary video
Primary video
e.g.,
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 39 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Playing back video
VQT3C73
40
Playing recorded video contents
To playback of the playlist created on other equipment
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Select “Playlists” in “Others”, then press [OK].
3 Select the playlist, then press [OK].
¾ To display the menu screen (> 21)
¾ About DivX VOD content (> 107)
Multiple titles may not playback continuously depending on the disc.
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR], and playback by selecting the title.
Playback of DivX and MKV is not possible during recording.
Some DivX and MKV file may not be played back, depending on the
video resolution and frame rate condition.
DivX and MKV
1 While the file list is displayed
Press [OPTION].
2 Select “Select Folder”, then press [OK].
You cannot select folders that contain no compatible
files.
3 Select the folder, then press [OK].
The file list for the folder appears.
§
§
DivX and MKV file only
[HDD]:
1 Press [DRIVE SELECT], then
select “HDD”.
2 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Except [HDD]:
1 Insert the media.
2 Select the item in the menu
screen, then press [OK].
It will go to step automatically
depending on the disc.
TIME SLIP
PROG/CHECK
STATUS
DIRECT TV REC
AUDIO
-10s +60s
REC MODE EXT LINK
REC
TEXT STTL
CHAPTER
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
G
U
I
D
E
RETURN
PLAY/x1.3
PAUSE
PAUSE LIVE TV
STOP
SLOW/SEARCH
SKIP
CH
PAGE
SELECT
INPUT
CH
AV
TV
DRIVE
SELECT
DEL
EXIT
OK
OPTION
MANUAL SKIP
VOL
0
2
abc
5
jkl
8
tuv
1
4
ghi
7
qrs
p
3
def
6
mno
9
xyz
w
INPUT
REWIND LIVE TV
Time Remaining 45:54 (DR)
HDD
Page
Select Copy
Grouped Titles VIDEO
OPTION
Start Time
Prog.Type:
Rec time
PLAY
RETURN
PHOTO / MUSIC
Social/Economic
Sport Video (AVCHD)MovieNot Viewed
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
Channel Date Title Name Titles
All
Delete
Page Up
Page Down
Movie
9:00 0:01(DR)
Select the title, then press [OK].
Resume play function
If the following screen appears, select the point to
start playback.
AVCHD: If the menu screen is not displayed
Press [PLAY/a1.3 1].
Using the tree screen to find a folder
Playback
Last Stopped
Beginning
Where do you want to start playback from ?
OK
RETURN
CD ( Video )
Video Menu
Select Folder
Page 01/01
F
OK
RETURN
01_01_2010
1 / 5
F: Selected folder no./Total folder no. including DivX and
MKV title.
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 40 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Playing back video
VQT3C73
41
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
e.g., [HDD]
§
Only “All” will be displayed in “Label” when using the
media other than HDD.
[HDD]
Titles recorded to HDD will be categorized automatically.
You can quickly find the recorded titles by selecting the
label.
Select the label with [2, 1].
To sort a selected title from the “All” label into the
programme type labels, set “Prog.Type” of the title.
(> 49, Changing programme type of title)
To change the displayed label, go to “Changing the
programme type” on page 42.
High Definition video (AVCHD) acquired from the disc, SD
card or USB device is sorted to “Video ( AVCHD )”
automatically.
Using the
DIRECT NAVIGATOR (VIDEO)
Label
Time Remaining 45:54 (DR)
HDD
Page
Select Copy
Grouped Titles VIDEO
OPTION
Start Time
Prog.Type:
Rec time
PLAY
RETURN
PHOTO / MUSIC
Social/Economic
Sport Video (AVCHD)MovieNot Viewed
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
Channel Date Title Name Titles
All
Delete
Page Up
Page Down
Movie
9:00 0:01(DR)
Label
§
Selected title
Icons (> right)
Programme type
([HDD] only)
Thumbnail ([HDD] only)
Time Remaining 45:54 (DR)
HDD
Grouped Titles
Start Time
Prog.Type:
Rec time
Social/Economic
SportNot Viewed
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
Channel Date Title Name
All
Movie
9:00 0:01(DR)
Movie
Screen icons
[ Currently recording programme
Protected title
Title was not recorded due to recording
protection
t
Title cannot be played
(When copying a title to the HDD, or when data
is damaged etc.)
Title is copy protected (One generation copy is
permitted) (> 13)
Title is imposed a limit on the playable period.
(> 13)
Playback period limit can be checked in the
information of that title. (> 42)
The icon turns grey after the playback period
has passed.
Title cannot be edited (except deleting) or
copied.
When the title has not been played and
decrypted, it will not be displayed.
Encrypted title
Title has failed to be decrypted
Press [STATUS ] to show the reason of the
failure.
Grouped titles
Title has not yet been played
Title is recorded using a different encoding
system from that of the TV system on the unit.
Alter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit
(> 91).
Radio programme
3D contents
This icon will not display even with 3D
programmes when a broadcast programme is
recorded.
Recorded in 1080/50p contents
Recorded in 1080/60p contents
Recording did not complete as the timer
recording has started.
&
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 41 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Playing back video
VQT3C73
42
Playing recorded video contents
[HDD]
1 Press the “Red” button.
2 Select “PHOTO” or “MUSIC”, then
press [OK].
[BD-RE] [RAM]
Press the “Red” button.
The screen switches from “VIDEO” to “PHOTO”.
[HDD]
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Select “Grouped Titles” or “All Titles”,
then press [OK].
[HDD]
While displaying Grouped Titles screen:
Select the item marked with , then press
[OK].
[HDD]
Programme type displayed in the label can be changed.
1 Select the programme type, then press the
“Green” button.
2 Select the item, then press [OK].
“All”, “Not Viewed” and “Video ( AVCHD )” cannot be changed.
Select the title, then press [STATUS ].
Information of a recording title cannot be displayed.
[HDD]
The titles will be played continuously.
Select the group, then press [PLAY/a1.3 1].
This function cannot be used if the group includes any encrypted title
().
[HDD]
1 Select the title or the group, then press the
“Yellow” button.
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step.
Press the “Yellow” button again to cancel.
If you perform “Remove”, select the title in the group.
2 Press [OPTION].
3 Select the item, then press [OK].
[HDD]
1 Select the group, then press [OPTION].
2 Select “Edit”, then press [OK].
3 Select “Enter Title Name”, then press
[OK].
(> 76, Entering text)
Even if the group name is changed, the title names in the
group will not be changed.
Switching to the PHOTO or MUSIC
screen
Switching the appearance
Grouped
Titles
Two or more titles recorded in the
daily/weekly timer recording mode are
bundled and displayed as one item.
All Titles Displays all titles.
To view the individual titles in
grouped titles
Changing the programme type
Showing Information
Playback grouped titles
Editing the grouped titles
Create
Group
Selected titles are bundled to form a group.
Select “Create”, then press [OK].
Release
Grouping
All the titles in the group are released.
SelectRelease”, then press [OK].
Remove Selected titles are removed from the group.
Select “Remove”, then press [OK].
Changing the group name
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 42 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Playing back video
VQT3C73
43
[HDD] [BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM] [DVD-R] [DVD-RW] [+R] [+RW]
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
2 Select the title, then press [OPTION].
3 Select the “Chapter View”, then press
[OK].
Chapter View screen
e.g., [HDD]
4 Select the chapter, then press [OK].
¾ Editing chapters in Chapter View (> 51)
[HDD] [BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM]
During the playback or pause
Press [CHAPTER].
To delete the Chapter Mark
1 While paused
Press [SKIP :] or [SKIP 9] and skip to the location
you want to delete.
2 Press [CHAPTER].
3 Select “Yes”, then press [OK].
The maximum number of chapters:
(Depends on the state of recording.)
[HDD]: Approx. 1000 per title
[BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM]: Approx. 1000 per disc
[HDD] When the title has the maximum number of chapters, you cannot
perform the Resume play function (> 40) or the “Change Thumbnail”
(> 49) with the title.
Chapters cannot be created in encrypted title ( ).
Playback from Chapter View
Time Remaining 45:54 (DR)
HDD
Page
Select Copy
Grouped Titles VIDEO
OPTION
Start Time
Prog.Type:
Rec time
PLAY
RETURN
PHOTO / MUSIC
Social/Economic
Sport Video (AVCHD)MovieNot Viewed
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
Channel Date Title Name Titles
All
Delete
Page Up
Page Down
Movie
9:00 0:01(DR)
Press OK to start playing from
the selected chapter.
Selected chapter can be edited
via OPTION.
Press RETURN to go back to
previous menu.
Page 001/001
0:00.00
001
0:12.29
PLAY
SelectEdit Chapter Mark
OK
RETURN
OPTION
Delete
To create Chapter Marks
Regarding chapters
You can divide a title into multiple chapters. Each section
between the division points (Chapter Marks) becomes a
chapter.
Chapter Creation
[HDD]
This unit can create chapters automatically while
recording broadcasting. (> 88)
If the title is recorded in the encrypted form, the chapter will be
created only after the title is decrypted.
Chapter
Title
Chapter Chapter Chapter
Chapter Marks
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 43 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Playing back video
VQT3C73
44
Operation during play
§
§
DivX and MKV file only
Depending on the media and the type of file, some operations may not
be possible.
Depending on the media, it may take time for the menu screen, pictures,
sound, etc. to start.
Discs continue to rotate while menus are displayed. Press [STOP ]
when you have finished playback to protect the unit’s motor, your TV
screen, etc.
Titles that are copy protected (Copying is prohibited) cannot be viewed
going back in time more than the allowed playback period. (> 13)
Press [STATUS ] twice.
e.g.,
Title number and elapsed time during play and recording
mode
Press [STOP ].
The stopped position is memorized.
Resume play function
Press [PLAY/a1.3 1] to restart from this position.
The resume play function does not work depending on the
disc.
Stopped position
Press [SLOW/SEARCH 6] or
[SLOW/SEARCH 5].
Press [PLAY/a1.3 1] to restart play.
The speed increases up to 5 steps.
([+R] [+RW] Up to 3 steps)
Audio is heard during first level search forward.
DivX and MKV: Audio is not heard during all levels search.
Skip forward 1 minute
Press [MANUAL SKIP +60s].
Skip backward 10 seconds
Press [MANUAL SKIP -10s].
Each time you press, play skips forward or backward.
DivX and MKV: This function is not effective.
Play speed is quicker than normal.
Press and hold [PLAY/a1.3 1].
Press again to return to normal speed.
DivX and MKV: This function is not effective.
[DVD-RW] This function is not effective even if it is finalised.
This function cannot be used on encrypted titles ( ).
Press [PAUSE ;].
Press [PAUSE ;] again or [PLAY/a1.3 1] to restart play.
While paused, press [SLOW/SEARCH 6]
or [SLOW/SEARCH 5].
Press [PLAY/a1.3 1] to restart play.
The speed increases up to 5 steps.
DivX and MKV: This function is not effective.
[BD-V] and AVCHD: Forward direction [SLOW/SEARCH 5] only.
This function cannot be used on encrypted titles ( ).
Showing status messages
Stop
[HDD]: Stopped position for each title is memorized.
Discs: Only previous stopped position is memorized.
The position is cleared if the tray is opened or the
unit is turned off.
Search
8:05:50 01.01.2011
T1 0:05.14 DR
0:30.00
Remain HDD
Manual Skip
Quick View
Pause
Slow-motion
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 44 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Playing back video
VQT3C73
45
While paused, press [2](2;) or [1](;1).
Each press shows the next frame.
Press and hold to change in succession forward or
backward.
Press [PLAY/a1.3 1] to restart play.
DivX and MKV: This function is not effective.
[BD-V] and AVCHD: Forward direction [1](;1) only.
This function cannot be used on encrypted titles ( ).
Skip to the title or chapter you want to play.
During play or while paused, press
[SKIP :] or [SKIP 9].
It will skip to the beginning of chapters (> 43) if the title contains
chapters.
[HDD] It will not skip the title. But the title in the grouped titles during the
“Playback grouped titles” (> 42) will be skipped.
[SKIP 9] is not effective for encrypted titles ( ).
1 Press [TIME SLIP].
2 Select the time with [3, 4], then press
[OK].
Play skips the specified time.
Press and hold [3, 4] to change the time by
10-minute.
[BD-V] [DVD-V], DivX, MKV and AVCHD: This function is not effective.
Press [AUDIO].
It will switch depending on the contents recorded every
time it is pressed.
[HDD] [BD-RE] [BD-R]
Press [STTL ].
If you want to switch the subtitle language, select the
subtitle with “Subtitle Language” in the Disc menu
(> 82).
[BD-V] [DVD-V], DivX, MKV and AVCHD:
Display with “Subtitles” in the Disc menu
(> 82).
DivX and MKV: If the subtitles text are not displayed correctly, try
changing the language settings (> 107, Displaying subtitle text).
[HDD] [BD-RE] [BD-R]
Press [TEXT ].
Teletext display mode is TOP (FLOF) only.
Some functions may not work.
Teletext cannot be displayed when the subtitles are set to ON.
You can switch the screen mode. (> 98)
Frame-by-frame
Skipping the title or chapter
Skipping the specified time
(Time Slip)
-
10min.
This automatically disappears
after approximately
5 seconds. To show the
screen again press
[TIME SLIP] again.
Changing audio
Switching subtitles
Displaying the Teletext
Aspect
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 45 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Playing back video
VQT3C73
46
Enjoying 3D video
You can enjoy powerful 3D videos with realistic sensations
by connecting this unit with a High Speed HDMI Cable to a
3D compatible TV.
Preparation
Connect 3D compatible TV to an HDMI AV OUT terminal of
this unit using a High Speed HDMI Cable. (> 15)
Perform the necessary preparations for the TV.
Playback following the instructions displayed on the screen.
Perform the following settings as necessary.
Change this setting when the screen such as playback
settings, etc., is not correctly displayed for 3D compatible
programmes.
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Select “3D Settings”, then press [OK].
3 Select the item, then press [OK].
§
This function is not effective while watching broadcast.
Depending on the contents, displayed items are different.
Subtitles and TV Guide, etc., may not display correctly depending on the
settings.
This unit does not guarantee the playback of 3D programme types other
than the Frame Packing type or the Side-by-Side (Half) type.
Please refrain from viewing 3D images if you do not feel well or are
experiencing visual fatigue.
In the event that you experience dizziness, nausea, or other discomfort
while viewing 3D images, discontinue use and rest your eyes.
When “3D Type” (> 91) is “Side by side” change the 3D setting on the
TV too.
Depending on the connected TV, the video being played back might
switch to 2D video due to changes in resolution etc. Check the 3D
setting on the TV.
3D video might not output as settings of “HDMI Video Format” (> 91)
and “24p Output” (> 91).
It may display as Side-by-Side (2 screen structure) when playback of the
3D video is started.
Depending on the operation, the setting of the “Signal Format” may
return to “Original” and the setting of the “3D Picture Mode” may return
to “Normal” when the content is switched or some other operation is
performed while viewing.
3D settings
3D BD-Video
Playback
[BD-V]
It is also possible to play back 3D discs in
2D (conventional video). (> 86)
3D Type If 3D video cannot be played back in 3D,
change the settings as required by the
connected TV format. (> 91)
3D Playback
Message
Hide the 3D viewing warning screen.
(> 91)
HDMI (SUB)
Output Mode
[BST800]
If the amplifier is connected to the HDMI
AV OUT (SUB) terminal (> 19), set to
“HDMI (SUB) Output Mode” (> 91).
HDMI (SUB) V.OFF LED on this unit will
light.
Graphic
Display Level
[BD-V]
Adjust the pop-up position for the
playback menu or message screen etc.
(> 82)
The image is an illustration.
Convenient functions while viewing
the 3D video
Signal
Format
Original Keep original picture format.
Side by
side
3D picture format comprising of left
and right screens.
Check the “3D Type” (> 91) and the
3D setting of the TV if it does not
display correctly even if changed.
2D to 3D
§
Converts 2D pictures to 3D effect
while playing.
3D
Picture
Mode
§
Normal Playback pictures with normal 3D
effects.
Soft You can enjoy 3D pictures with a
feeling of broadness, holding back the
depth perception.
This function cannot be enabled
when “Signal Format” is set to “2D
to 3D”.
Manual
Settings
Set 3D effect manually.
Distance
Set the amount of depth perception.
Screen Type
Selects how the screen appears
during 3D playback (flat or round).
Frame Width
Set the amount of feathering at the
edge of screen.
Frame Colour
Set the colour of feathering at the
edge of screen.
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 46 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Editing video
VQT3C73
47
Deleting recorded titles
Editing video
Once deleted, recorded content cannot be restored to
its original state. Make certain before proceeding.
1 While playing
Press [DEL].
2 Select “Delete”, then press [OK].
You cannot delete items on finalised discs.
While stopped
Press [DRIVE SELECT], then
select “HDD” or “BD”.
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Select the title, then press the
“Yellow” button.
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step.
Press the “Yellow” button again to cancel.
Press [DEL].
Select “Delete”, then press
[OK].
TIME SLIP
PROG/CHECK
STATUS
DIRECT TV REC
AUDIO
-10s +60s
REC MODE EXT LINK
REC
TEXT STTL
CHAPTER
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
G
U
I
D
E
RETURN
PLAY/x1.3
PAUSE
PAUSE LIVE TV
STOP
SLOW/SEARCH
SKIP
CH
PAGE
SELECT
INPUT
CH
AV
TV
DRIVE
SELECT
DEL
EXIT
OK
OPTION
MANUAL SKIP
VOL
0
2
abc
5
jkl
8
tuv
1
4
ghi
7
qrs
p
3
def
6
mno
9
xyz
w
INPUT
REWIND LIVE TV
Time Remaining 45:54 (DR)
HDD
Page
Select Copy
Grouped Titles VIDEO
OPTION
Start Time
Prog.Type:
Rec time
PLAY
RETURN
PHOTO / MUSIC
Social/Economic
Sport Video (AVCHD)MovieNot Viewed
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
Channel Date Title Name Titles
All
Delete
Page Up
Page Down
Movie
9:00 0:01(DR)
Deleting during play
Available disc space after deleting
[HDD] [BD-RE] [RAM]
The space deleted becomes available for recording.
[DVD-RW] [+RW]
Available recording space increases only when the last
recorded title is deleted.
[BD-R] [DVD-R] [+R]
Available space does not increase even after the contents
are deleted.
......
Last title
recorded
Available
disc space
Later
recorded
titles
This space becomes available for recording after all
the later recorded titles are deleted.
Title Deleted
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 47 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Editing video
VQT3C73
48
Editing recorded titles
Once deleted, divided or partially deleted, recorded
content cannot be restored to its original state. Make
certain before proceeding.
With titles that are copy protected (Copying is prohibited),
you cannot perform editing other than Delete. (> 13)
You cannot edit finalised discs.
Depending on the media and the type of file, some operations may not
be possible.
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
2 Select the title.
Multiple editing
Press the “Yellow button.
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step.
Press the “Yellow” button again to cancel.
3 Press [OPTION].
4 Select the item, then press [OK].
Edit” has several functions (e.g., File Conversion).
1 Select “Delete Title”, then press [OK].
2 Select “Delete”, then press [OK].
Select “Enter Title Name” in “Edit”, then
press [OK].
(> 76, Entering text)
[HDD] [BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM] [+R] [+RW]
Protection setting prevents the title from accidental deletion.
1 Select “Set up Protection” or “Cancel
Protection” in “Edit”, then press [OK].
2 Select “Yes”, then press [OK].
appears when setting the protection.
This function cannot be used on encrypted titles ( ).
Time Remaining 45:54 (DR)
HDD
Page
Select Copy
Grouped Titles VIDEO
OPTION
Start Time
Prog.Type:
Rec time
PLAY
RETURN
PHOTO / MUSIC
Social/Economic
Sport Video (AVCHD)MovieNot Viewed
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
Channel Date Title Name Titles
All
Delete
Page Up
Page Down
Movie
9:00 0:01(DR)
Set up Protection
Cancel Protection
Partial Delete
Divide Title
Change Prog.Type
Change Thumbnail
File Conversion
File Decryption
Enter Title Name
Delete Title
Playback
Information
Chapter View
Create Group
Release Grouping
Edit
All Titles
Deleting
Entering title name
Setting protection
Start Time
Prog.Type:
Rec time
Social/Economic
MovieNot Viewed
Channel Date Title Name
All
Movie
9:00
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 48 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Editing video
VQT3C73
49
[HDD] [BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM]
1 Select “Partial Delete” in “Edit”, then
press [OK].
2 Press [OK] at the start point and end point
to delete.
Press [PLAY/a1.3 1] to start the playback when the
title is paused.
3 Select “Continue”, then press [OK].
Select “Next”, then press [OK] to delete other sections.
Up to 20 sections can be set. (> go to step 2)
4 Select “Delete”, then press [OK].
Chapter Mark is generated in the scene that was
partially deleted.
5 Press [RETURN ].
You can find the desired point by using search or Time slip function, etc.
You cannot set points if they are too close to each other. You cannot set
an end point before a start point.
This function cannot be used on encrypted titles ( ).
[HDD] [BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM]
1 Select “Divide Title” in “Edit”, then press
[OK].
2 Press [OK] at the point to divide the title.
3 Select “Continue”, then press [OK].
4 Select “Divide”, then press [OK].
To confirm the division point
Select “Preview”, then press [OK]. (The unit plays
10 seconds before and after the division point.)
To change the division point
Restart play and select “Divide”, then press [OK] at the
division point.
Video and audio just before and after the division point may momentarily
cut out.
[HDD] Divided titles form a group of titles.
You can find the desired point by using search or Time slip function, etc.
This function cannot be used on encrypted titles ( ).
[HDD] [RAM] [DVD-R] [DVD-RW] [+R] [+RW]
1 Select “Change Thumbnail” in “Edit”, then
press [OK].
2 Press [PLAY/a1.3 1] to start play.
3 Press [OK] at the point to use as a
thumbnail.
To change the point
Restart play and select “Change”, then press [OK] at
the point to change.
4 SelectFinish”, then press [OK].
[DVD-R] [DVD-RW] [+R] [+RW] It is possible to change the image displayed
on the Top Menu after finalising or creating Top Menu.
You can find the desired point by using search or Time slip function, etc.
This function cannot be used on encrypted titles ( ).
[HDD]
Programme type information in the title can be edited.
1 Select “Change Prog.Type” in “Edit”, then
press [OK].
2 Select the item to change a programme
type, then press [OK].
3 Select the programme type, then press
[OK].
4 Select “Set”, then press [OK].
Partial deleting
Dividing title
Start
Next
Continue
0:43.21
End
Start End
Please set the start
point with playback
operation and skip.
OK
RETURN
Divide
Preview
Continue
0:00.22
Divide
OK
RETURN
PLAY
Changing thumbnail
Changing programme type of title
Change
Finish
0:00.22
Change
OK
RETURN
Start play and select the image of
a thumbnail.
Select the item for prog.type change.
OK
RETURN
Movie
Prog.Type
1
( No Prog.Type )
Prog.Type
2
Set Cancel
( No Prog.Type )
Prog.Type
3
Change Prog.Type
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 49 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Editing video
VQT3C73
50
Editing recorded titles
[HDD]
File Conversion is a function to convert the recording mode
of the title in DR mode and AVCHD contents. The size of the
converted title will be small regularly. It will take about the
same time as the recorded duration.
1 Select File Conversion” in “Edit”, then
press [OK].
e.g.,
2 Select the recording mode (> 6, 113), then
press [4].
3 Select whether to record the subtitle or
not, then press [4].
4 Select when to start the conversion, then
press [OK].
If an encrypted title ( ) is included, “Now” cannot be
selected.
5 Select whether to delete the original title
or not, then press [OK].
The original title will be deleted after File Conversion
when a title that is copy protected (One generation
copy is permitted) is selected. (> 13)
To cancel a “Now” conversion
Press and hold [RETURN ] for more than 3 seconds.
To confirm whether the conversion is completed
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
e.g.,
When±± > ±± (Recording mode for conversion)” is
displayed, the conversion has not finished.
To cancel aDuring standby” conversion
After performing steps 1–3 (> 48)
1 Select “File Conversion” in “Edit”, then press [OK].
2 Select “Yes”, then press [OK].
To use “File Conversion”, the HDD needs enough storage capacity.
The size of converted title might increase depending on the title (such as
radio programmes).
Teletext will not be recorded.
File Conversion is stopped when this unit is turned on during performing
“During standby” conversion. Conversion will start from the beginning
again once the unit is turned off.
When converted, the audio content and subtitle language will be
selected according to the following settings:
– “Multi Audio” of “Preferred Language” (> 86).
– “Audio for HG / HX / HE / HL / HM Recording” (> 90)
– “Subtitles” of “Preferred Language” (> 86).
When converted, 3D information may not be retained.
In titles with the Auto Renewal Recording function (> 36) set, a
programme may be unintentionally converted while in “During standby”.
File Conversion
Automatic Subtitles will be recorded for titles with
subtitles.
You cannot switch the subtitle on or off
during the playback.
Off Subtitle will not be recorded.
Now Conversion begins immediately after
step 6.
Recording and playback are
impossible during conversion. Timer
recording will not be performed during
conversion.
During
standby
Conversion will be performed after the
unit is turned off in a time slot for
which no timer recording is set.
Convert &
Delete
The original title will be deleted to
save HDD capacity after conversion.
Convert Only The original title remains after
conversion.
File Conversion
Convert the selected title by changing its recording mode.
Please select recording mode and other options, then press OK.
RETURN
Subtitles
Off
Recording Mode
HL -- Longer Play
Timing
During standby
OK
6
“Now conversion:
Select “Start”, then press [OK].
“During standby” conversion:
Press [OK].
Conversion is performed when the unit is turned off.
“COPY” on the units display remains lighted during
conversion.
If the title is encrypted ( ), conversion will start
after decryption.
COPY
Time Remaining 45:54 (DR)
HDD
Page
Select Copy
Grouped Titles VIDEO
OPTION
Start Time
Prog.Type:
Rec time
PLAY
RETURN
PHOTO / MUSIC
Social/Economic
Sport Video (AVCHD)MovieNot Viewed
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
Channel Date Title Name Titles
All
Delete
Page Up
Page Down
Movie
9:00
0:01(DR HL)
(DR HL)
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 50 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Editing video
VQT3C73
51
[HDD]
Encrypted titles ( ) can be decrypted manually.
1 Select “File Decryption”, then press [OK].
2 Select whether to delete the original title
or not, then press [OK].
3 Select “Start”, then press [OK].
Decryption starts.
“Decrypting” appears during decryption.
When a title that is copy protected (One generation
copy is permitted) is selected, the original title will be
deleted after decryption. (> 13)
When a decryption fails, the screen icon ( ) is
changed to ”.
To cancel the decryption
Press and hold [RETURN ] for more than 3 seconds.
For decryption, the CI module that supports the programme is
necessary.
Depending on the programme, playback/decryption may not be possible.
During decryption, do not remove the CI module from this unit.
[HDD] [BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM]
Select “Chapter View”, then press [OK].
Edit Chapter Mark:
Select the point where you want to start a new chapter
while viewing the title.
1 Press the “Green” button.
2 Press [OK] at the point you want to
divide.
Repeat this step.
3 Press [RETURN ] to go to Chapter
View screen.
To delete the chapter:
1 Select the chapter, then press [DEL].
Multiple editing
Select the chapter, then press the “Yellow” button.
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until
you select the chapters to be deleted.
Press the “Yellow” button again to cancel.
2 Select “Delete”, then press [OK].
To combine chapters (Delete chapter mark):
1 Select the chapter, then press
[OPTION].
2 Select “Combine Chapters”, then press
[OK].
3 Select “Combine”, then press [OK].
The selected chapter is combined to the next chapter.
¾ Playback from Chapter View (> 43)
This function cannot be used on encrypted titles ( ).
File Decryption
Yes The original title will be deleted to save
HDD capacity after decryption.
No The original title remains after decryption.
HDD
Decrypting
Editing chapters
Press OK to start playing from
the selected chapter.
Selected chapter can be edited
via OPTION.
Press RETURN to go back to
previous menu.
Page 001/001
0:00.00
001
0:12.29
PLAY
SelectEdit Chapter Mark
OK
RETURN
OPTION
Delete
Chapter View screen
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 51 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Copying video
VQT3C73
52
Copying titles
Copying video
¾ About CI Plus restriction (> 13)
Encrypted titles ( ) cannot be copied. (> 34)
If you wish to choose the audio language, select the language from
“Multi Audio” of “Preferred Language” before copying (> 86).
[DVD-R] Use “Copy Video ( AVCHD ) to Disc” when copying HD Video
(AVCHD format) in high definition. (> 58)
Insert a disc.
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to
select “HDD”, then press [OK].
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Select the title, then press the
“Yellow” button.
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step.
Press the “Yellow” button again to cancel.
TIME SLIP
PROG/CHECK
STATUS
DIRECT TV REC
AUDIO
-10s +60s
REC MODE EXT LINK
REC
TEXT STTL
CHAPTER
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
M
E
N
U
D
I
R
E
C
T
N
A
V
I
G
A
T
O
R
G
U
I
D
E
RETURN
PLAY/x1.3
PAUSE
PAUSE LIVE TV
STOP
SLOW/SEARCH
SKIP
CH
PAGE
SELECT
INPUT
CH
AV
TV
DRIVE
SELECT
DEL
EXIT
OK
OPTION
MANUAL SKIP
VOL
0
2
abc
5
jkl
8
tuv
1
4
ghi
7
qrs
p
3
def
6
mno
9
xyz
w
REWIND LIVE TV
INPUT
Time Remaining 45:54 (DR)
HDD
Page
Select Copy
Grouped Titles VIDEO
Start Time
Prog.Type:
Rec time
PLAY
RETURN
PHOTO / MUSIC
Social/Economic
Sport Video (AVCHD)MovieNot Viewed
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
Channel Date Title Name Titles
All
Delete
Page Up
Page Down
Movie
9:00 0:01(DR)
OPTION
Press the “Blue” button.
To start copying the selected title
Select “Yes”, then press [OK].
To change selection (> 53)
Set other settings, then press
[OK].
e.g.,
(> 53, Setting the copying options)
Select “Yes”, then press [OK] to
start copying.
Please set copy setting and press OK.
OK
RETURN
Automatic Standby after Copy
Off
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 52 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Copying video
VQT3C73
53
1 Select “No”, then press [OK] in step
(> 52).
e.g., [HDD] > [BD-RE]
3 Go to step (> 52).
¾ Screen icons on the DIRECT NAVIGATOR (> 41)
To change the selection
The order of copying
Remaining
space
You can check if
there is enough
disc volume at
the copy
destination.
2
To change the selected titles
Select the title, then press the “Yellow”
button.
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step.
Press the “Yellow” button again to cancel.
To change the picture quality
1 Select the title, then press [OPTION].
2 Select “Conversion Select”, then
press [OK].
3 Select the picture quality, then press
[OK].
Repeat steps 1–3 if you want to select the picture
quality for other titles.
HDD
Page
Select Copy
Grouped Titles BD-RE Remain
Start Time
Prog.Type:
Rec time
OK
RETURN
Social/Economic
Sport Video (AVCHD)MovieNot Viewed
Copy
Channel Date Title Name Titles
All
Page Up
Page Down
Movie
9:00 0:01(DR)
1
2
90%
OPTION
Screen icons
Titles that will be copied to the disc in normal
speed
Setting the copying options
Select the item in step (> 52).
1 Select the item.
2 Press [2, 1] to change the settings.
Automatic
Standby after
Copy
Select “Onor “Off”.
If “On” is selected, this unit is turned to standby
mode when it is not operated for approximately
5 minutes after completing copy.
Subtitles Select “Automatic” or “Off”.
If you wish to choose the subtitle, select the
language from “Subtitles” of “Preferred
Language” before copying (> 86).
Finalise
([HDD] >
[DVD-R] [DVD-RW]
[+R] only)
Create Top
Menu
([HDD] >
[+RW] only)
Select “Onor “Off”.
If “On” is selected in “Finalise”, the discs become
play-only and you can also play them on other
DVD equipment. However, you can no longer
record or edit.
If “Off” is selected, it is possible to perform
“Finalise” or “Create Top Menu” later. (> 75)
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 53 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Copying video
VQT3C73
54
Copying titles
[BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM] [+RW] > [HDD]
1 Insert a disc.
The menu screen appears.
2 Select “Play Video”, then press [OK].
e.g., [BD-RE]
3 Select the title, then press the “Yellow”
button.
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step.
Press the “Yellow” button again to cancel.
4 Press the “Blue” button.
To change the detailed settings for copy, refer to
“Copying titles with copying list” (> right).
5 Select “Start Copying”, then press [OK].
6 Select “Yes”, then press [OK] to start
copying.
1 Insert a disc.
The menu screen appears.
2 Select “Copy”, then press [OK].
3 Set the copy direction.
1 Select “Copy Direction”, then press [1] (right).
2 Set “Source”.
3 Press [2] to confirm.
4 Set the recording mode (> 6, 113).
1 Select “Copy Mode”, then press [1] (right).
2 Set “Recording Mode”.
3 Press [2] to confirm.
Copying to HDD with
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
Time Remaining 3:30 (DR)
BD-RE
Page
Select Copy
All Titles VIDEO
OPTION
Start Time Rec time
PLAY
RETURN
PHOTO
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
Channel Date Title Name
All
Delete
Page Up
Page Down
9:00 0:30 (DR)
Time Remaining 1:00 (DR)
BD-RE
Page
Select Copy
All Titles VIDEO
OPTION
Start Time Rec time
PLAY
RETURN
PHOTO
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
Channel Date Title Name
All
Delete
Page Up
Page Down
9:00 0:30 (DR)
Copy
1
2
3
Cancel All
Copy Direction
Copy Mode
Create List
Start Copying
HDD
High Speed
RETURN
OK
2
Press OK to start copying.
BD / DVD
Copying titles with copying list
[HDD] > [BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM] [DVD-R] [DVD-RW] [+R] [+RW]
[BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM] [+RW] > [HDD]
Copy
HDD
BD / DVD
1
2
3
Source
Destination
Cancel All
Copy Direction
Copy Mode
Create List
Start Copying
HDD BD / DVD
High Speed
Select the copy direction.
RETURN
0
Information of the copy destination
- BD-RE
- Copy restricted titles can be
copied on to disc
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 54 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Copying video
VQT3C73
55
5 Register titles for copy.
1 Select “Create List”, then press [1] (right).
2 Select “New item”, then press [OK].
3 Select the titles, then press [OK].
e.g., [HDD]
(> 56, Selecting the titles for the copying list)
4 Press [2] to confirm.
6 Set other settings.
1 Select “Other Settings”, then press [1] (right).
e.g.,
This screen does not appear depending on the
copying mode. (> go to step 7)
2 Select the copying option, then press [OK].
Subtitles
Select “Automatic” or “Off”, then press [OK].
Finalise
Create Top Menu
Select “On” or “Off”, then press [OK].
3 Press [2] to confirm.
7 Select “Start Copying”, then press [OK].
8 Select “Yes”, then press [OK] to start
copying.
To cancel all registered copying settings and lists
After performing steps 1–2
1 Select “Cancel All”, then press [OK].
2 Select “Yes”, then press [OK].
¾ To display the menu screen (> 21)
Encrypted titles ( ) cannot be copied. (> 34)
If you wish to choose the audio language and subtitle language, select
the language from “Multi Audio” of “Preferred Language” before copying
(> 86).
Titles in the grouped titles and other titles cannot be registered
simultaneously.
If you wish to choose the subtitle, select the language from
“Subtitles” of “Preferred Language” before copying (> 86).
If “On” is selected in “Finalise”, the discs become play-only
and you can also play them on other DVD equipment.
However, you can no longer record or edit.
If “Off” is selected, it is possible to perform “Finalise” or
“Create Top Menu” later. (> 75)
RETURN
Time
Rec time
Size 1360 MB
0:30 (DR)
9:00
Page
Select
OPTION
Page Up
Page Down
HDD
OK
001/003
Create List Grouped Titles
01.01
15:00
1
02.01
9:30
1
03.01
10:00
1
03.01
18:30
1
04.01
2:00
1
05.01
11:00
1
05.01
15:00
1
06.01
3:45
1
06.01
9:00
1
01.01
9:00
1
Date Channel
Time
Title Name
Titles
Copy
1
2
3
Cancel All
Copy Direction
Copy Mode
Create List
4
Other Settings
Start Copying
HDD BD / DVD
HG
Please change the settings if required.
RETURN
1
Off
Off
Subtitles
Finalise
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 55 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Copying video
VQT3C73
56
Copying titles
Select the item in step 5-3 (> 55).
Press the “Yellow” button.
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select
all necessary items.
Press the “Yellow” button again to cancel.
The title will be copied in the order of the copying list. If you
want to specify the order, edit the copying list after the items
are selected. (> right)
Copying list indicators
Selecting the titles for the copying list
Other operation
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Select the item, then press [OK].
Information Information is shown.
Sort
(All Titles screen
only)
Titles are sorted according to the
selected item.
Grouped Titles
All Titles
Switch to Grouped Titles screen or All
Titles screen.
Copying list icons and functions
Titles that cannot be copied in high speed
mode
Title contains photos
Photos cannot be copied.
(NTSC)
(PAL)
Title recorded using a different encoding
system from that of the TV system currently
selected on the unit.
Titles displaying these marks cannot be
selected.
Data size of each registered item
Size:
Data size recorded to the copy
destination
When copying at normal speed, the
total data size will change according
to the recording mode.
The total data size shown may be
larger than the sum of the data sizes
for each registered item, because of
data management information being
written to the copy destination, etc.
Grouped Titles
Sort
Information
Page 01/01
Size:
Destination Capacity:
No. Size
New item (Total=0)
Title
( 0% )
0 MB
20806 MB
Editing the copying list
Select the title after step 5-3 (> 55).
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Select the item, then press [OK].
Delete All All titles that you registered to copy are
deleted.
Select “Yes, then press [OK].
Add Add new items to the copying list.
1 Select the title, then press the
“Yellow” button.
A check mark is displayed. Repeat
this step until you select all necessary
items.
Press the “Yellow” button again to
cancel.
2Press [OK].
Delete Select “Yes, then press [OK].
Move Move selected items or change the order
of items on the copying list.
Select the destination, then press
[OK].
Add
Delete
Move
Delete All
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 56 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Copying video
VQT3C73
57
The following recording mode and media combinations
support high speed copying.
Converting the recording mode will result in a normal speed
copy.
It is impossible to copy at high speed in the following cases:
[HDD] > [BD-RE] [BD-R] :
Copying title recorded in 1080/50p or 1080/60p
[HDD] > [DVD-R] [DVD-RW] [+R] [+RW] :
Copy including a title that was recorded to HDD with “Rec for High
Speed Copy” set to “Off” (> 88)
Titles that contain many deleted segments
Titles that have been copied to the HDD from an SD card or a
Panasonic video camera, etc. with HDD (SD Video) (> 73)
[HDD] > [+R] [+RW] :
Titles recorded in “EP” mode and “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)”
mode
Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect
[HDD] > [DVD-R] [DVD-RW] :
Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect using “EP” mode or “FR (recordings
5 hours or longer)” mode
You cannot copy to the disc in the following cases.
[DVD-R] [DVD-RW] [+R] [+RW]
When there is not enough free space on the HDD.
When the number of titles recorded to the HDD and the
number of titles to be copied to the disc is greater than
999 in total.
[DVD-R] [DVD-RW] [+R] [+RW]
If copy is cancelled during the step while temporarily
copying to the HDD, then nothing will be copied.
[BD-R] [DVD-R] [DVD-RW] [+R] [+RW]
Even if the title was not copied to the disc, the amount of
remaining writable disc space becomes less.
When copying title recorded in 1080/50p or 1080/60p, it
cannot copy in progressive. (> 117)
[RAM]
When copying to DVD-RAM using “8 hours” mode, play may
not be possible on DVD players that are compatible with
DVD-RAM. Use “6 hours” mode if playback may be on other
equipment. (> 88, Recording time in EP mode)
It may not display correctly in 3D when a copied 3D
programme is played back. In such a case, change the “3D
Settings” during the playback of the title. (> 46,
Convenient functions while viewing the 3D video)
3D information may not be copied.
The position of the chapter might shift slightly.
It will not maintain the exceeded amount if it exceeds the
maximum chapter numbers on a disc.
[BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM] [DVD-R] [DVD-RW] : Approx. 1000
[+R] [+RW] : Approx. 254
(Depends on the state of recording.)
Notes for copying
Notes for high speed copy
Original title’s
recording mode
Media
DR/HG/
HX/HE/
HL/HM
XP/SP/
LP/EP/
FR
§
DVD-RAM only
§
Notes for normal speed copy
Notes for copying to the DVD-RAM
Notes for copying 3D programmes
About maintaining the chapter mark
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 57 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Copying video
VQT3C73
58
Copying titles
1 Playback the title to copy.
Multiple audio, subtitle and Teletext displayed during
playback will be copied.
–Select the multiple audio with “Multi Audio in the
Disc menu (> 82)
–Select the subtitle with “Subtitle Language” in the
Disc menu (> 82)
2 Press [OPTION].
3 Select “Copy Title Playing”, then press
[OK].
4 Select “Start”, then press [OK].
Copying will start from the beginning of the title regardless
of the playing position.
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.
Encrypted titles ( ) cannot be copied.
You can record to or play HDD while high speed copying.
Press [OK] to exit the screen display.
Press [STATUS ] to confirm the current progress.
Speed and recording mode when copying
The high speed copy is performed if available.
¾ Notes for copying (> 57)
[BD-RE] [BD-R] When copying the titles in DR, HG, HX, HE, HL or HM
modes and the copy destination (disc) does not have enough space,
one from HG, HX, HE, HL or HM modes will be selected to match
the available space, and it will be copied with normal speed.
[RAM] [DVD-R] [DVD-RW] [+R] [+RW] When copying the titles in DR, HG,
HX, HE, HL or HM modes, copy will be performed at normal speed in
FR mode.
When copying the titles in XP, SP, LP, EP or FR modes and the
copy destination (disc) does not have enough space, copy will be
performed at normal speed in FR mode.
You can copy HD Video (AVCHD format) recorded on HDD
by a Panasonic video camera etc. to a disc.
[HDD] > [BD-RE] [BD-R] (High Definition)
Go to step 1 on page 54, “Copying titles
with copying list”.
Select “Original Picture Quality” or HG, HX, HE, HL or
HM mode in step 4-2.
[HDD] > [DVD-R] (High Definition)
1 Insert a new disc.
The menu screen appears.
2 Select “Copy Video ( AVCHD ) to
Disc”, then press [OK].
3 Go to step 5 on page 55, “Copying
titles with copying list”.
Go to step 1 on page 54, “Copying titles
with copying list”.
Select XP, SP, LP, EP or FR mode in step 4-2.
¾ Copying HD Video (AVCHD format) from other
equipment (> 72)
Copying Title Playing
[HDD] > [BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM] [DVD-R] [DVD-RW] [+R] [+RW]
[DVD-R] [DVD-RW] [+R] To play the disc on other players, it
is necessary to finalise them after copy (> 75).
[+RW] To play the disc on other players, we recommend
you create Top Menu (> 75), but they may not play on all
DVD players.
Copying HD Video
(AVCHD format) from HDD
¾ To display the menu screen (> 21)
This function can only be used for unformatted disc.
Discs will be automatically finalised after copy, making recording no
longer possible.
You can choose the thumbnail image of the Top Menu before using
this function. (> 49, Changing thumbnail)
The following HD Video (AVCHD format) cannot be copied to the
disc in high definition.
– Exceeding 18 Mbps
– 1080/50p or 1080/60p
– Without the AVCHD information (video recorded with certain non-
Panasonic equipment, video copied to the HDD after copying it to
BD-R or BD-RE once, etc.)
[HDD] > [BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM] [DVD-R] [DVD-RW] [+R] [+RW]
(Standard Definition)
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 58 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Copying video
VQT3C73
59
[DVD-V] > [HDD]
While playing a disc, the content being played is copied to
the HDD according to the set time.
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Select “Copy Video” in “Copy”, then
press [OK].
3 Set “Copy Mode”.
1 Select “Copy Mode, then press [1](right).
“Recording Mode” is selected.
2 Press [OK], then select the recording mode.
You can only select XP/SP/LP/EP.
3 Press [2] to confirm.
4 Set “Copy Time”.
1 Select “Copy Time”, then press [1] (right).
2 Select “Time Setting”, then press [OK].
3 Select “On” or “Off”.
When copying all the content on the disc select
“Off”.
When you select “On”, set the copying time.
Set a few minutes longer than the source title, in
order to include the operation time before play
begins.
4 Press [2] to confirm.
5 Select “Start Copying”, then press [OK].
6 Select “Yes”, then press [OK] to start
copying.
7 When the Top Menu is displayed
Select the title you want to start
copying, then press [OK].
After the last title on the disc has finished playing the
Top Menu is recorded until the set time is reached.
To stop copying
Press [STOP ].
You can also press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.
If stopped partway, copying will be up to that point.
Operations and on-screen displays during copy are also recorded.
Almost all DVD-Video on sale have been treated to prevent illegal
copying, and cannot be copied.
The content is recorded as 1 title from the start of copy to the end.
If play does not begin automatically press [PLAY/a1.3 1] to start.
Copying a finalised disc
Copy
1
2
3
Cancel All
Copy Direction
Copy Mode
Copy Time
Start Copying
BD / DVD HDD
SP
Press OK to change the setting.
2:00
OK
RETURN
Hour2 Min.00
Set the time a few minutes longer.
01/02
01
Mouse
03
05
02
04
06
Cattle
Tiger Rabbit
DSk
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 59 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Photo
VQT3C73
60
Playing photos
Photo
To stop the Slideshow
Press [RETURN ].
To pause the Slideshow
Press [PAUSE ;].
Press [PAUSE ;] again to restart.
To exit the Calendar screen
Press [PAUSE ;].
¾ Slideshow Settings (> 61)
You cannot play photos while recording or copying.
It may take a few moments for photos to display.
When there are many files and/or folders, some files may not be
displayed or be playable.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR (PHOTO) screen
Event
It is displayed for each recording date.
It is displayed for each folder for media other than HDD.
Screen icons:
§1
§2
§1
[BD-RE] only
§2
[RAM] [DVD-R] only
In order to play back 3D photo (MPO), this unit should be
connected to a Full HD 3D compatible TV via an HDMI
terminal.
[HDD]
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Select “Photo” in
“Playback Contents”, then
press [OK].
[BD-RE] [RAM] [DVD-R] [CD] [SD] [USB]
1 Insert the disc, SD card or
USB memory.
2 Select “View Photos”, then
press [OK].
Select the event, then press
[OK].
e.g., [HDD]
e.g., [SD]
To select the label
Press [2, 1].
Start Slideshow
1 Select a date or folder, then press theGreen”
button.
2 Select “Start Slideshow” then press [OK].
Switching the Calendar screen ([HDD])
Press [PAUSE ;].
HDD
Page
SelectSlideshow
Calendar
PHOTO
OPTION
03.01.2010
29.10.2010
25.02.2011
05.01.2010
0002/0002
Copy
OK
RETURN
VIDEO / MUSIC
8
12
18
4
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
Date & Event Name Photos
All Album 1 Album 2 Album 3 Album 4
3D
Page Up
Page Down
CH
Label
Page
SelectSlideshow
PHOTO
OPTION
001_AAA
0001/0001
Copy
OK
RETURN
4
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
Folder Name Photos
2D
SD card
3D
Select the photo, then press
[OK].
Press [2, 1] to display the previous or next
photo.
(Label)
Album ([HDD])
Placing photos in albums of your choice
makes it easier to find them. (> 62)
3D
(Label)
3D photos (MPO) are automatically sorted.
Select from this label to playback in 3D. (It will
playback in 2D when selected from other
labels)
Photo protected
[HDD]
New photo which is stored and not viewed
HDD
SelectSlideshow
Calendar
PHOTO
OPTION
03.01.2010
29.10.2010
25.02.2011
05.01.2010
Copy
OK
RETURN
VIDEO / MUSIC
8
12
18
4
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
Date & Event Name Photos
All Album 1 Album 2 Album 3 Album 4
Page
0002/0002
Page Up
Page Down
CH
3D
e.g., [HDD]
Album (> below)
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 60 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Photo
VQT3C73
61
[HDD]
1 While the DIRECT NAVIGATOR (PHOTO) screen
displayed
Press the “Red” button.
2 Select “VIDEO” or “MUSIC”, then press
[OK].
[BD-RE] [RAM]
While the DIRECT NAVIGATOR (PHOTO) screen
displayed
Press the “Red” button.
The screen switches from “PHOTO” to “VIDEO”.
1 While displaying a photo
Press [OPTION].
2 Select the item, then press [OK].
Start Slideshow
You can start a slideshow.
Rotate RIGHT, Rotate LEFT
Rotation information will not be stored depending on the
media.
Information
Information (shooting date etc.) is shown.
You can switch the screen mode. (> 98)
You can change the pop-up level of the screen display, etc.,
during the 3D photo playback.
You can set the items for slideshow.
While displaying DIRECT NAVIGATOR (PHOTO)
Press the “Green” button.
Start Slideshow
You can start a slideshow.
Interval
You can setup the time until the next photo is to display.
Transition Effect
Effect for the next photo to display can be set.
This function is not available during the 3D photo
playback.
Repeat Play
You can setup to playback repeatedly.
Music Selection
You can select background music on (either from HDD or
USB) or off.
This function is not available during the 3D photo
playback.
Background Music
You can select background music from HDD (My
Favourites or Playlists) or USB (Folder).
This function is not available during the 3D photo
playback.
Random BGM
You can playback the BGM in random order.
This function is not available during the 3D photo
playback.
Switching to the VIDEO or MUSIC
screens
Photo play option
Photo Menu
Aspect
Graphic Display Level
Slideshow Settings
Slideshow
OK
RETURN
Start Slideshow
Interval
Transition Effect
Repeat Play
Normal
Fade
On
Music Selection
No background music
Background Music
No List
Random BGM
Off
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 61 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Photo
VQT3C73
62
Editing photos
3 Select the item, then press [OK].
e.g., [HDD]
[HDD]
1 While selecting “All” label:
SelectAdd to Album in Edit”, then
press [OK].
2 Select the destination album, then press
[OK].
3 Press [OK].
[HDD]
1 While selecting album label and select multiple
events:
Select “Combine Events” in “Edit”, then
press [OK].
2 Select “Yes”, then press [OK].
§1
§2
§1
[BD-RE] only
§2
[RAM] only
1
[HDD]
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Select “Photo” in “Playback
Contents”, then press [OK].
[BD-RE] [RAM] [SD]
1 Insert the disc or the SD card.
2 Select “View Photos”, then press
[OK].
2
Editing the event:
Select the event, then press
[OPTION].
Editing the photo:
1 Select the event, then press [OK].
2 Select the photos to edit, then
press [OPTION].
Multiple editing
Select the item, then press the “Yellow” button.
(Repeat this step.)
A check mark appears.
Press the “Yellow” button again to cancel.
SD Card
OK
RETURN
SD card is inserted.
Play Video ( AVCHD )
View Photos
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Copy New Photos
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
e.g., [SD]
e.g., [HDD]
HDD
SelectSlideshow
Calendar
PHOTO
OPTION
03.01.2010
29.10.2010
25.02.2011
05.01.2010
Copy
OK
RETURN
VIDEO / MUSIC
8
12
18
4
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
Date & Event Name Photos
All Album 1 Album 2 Album 3 Album 4
3D
Page
0002/0002
Page Up
Page Down
CH
Add to Album
Combine Events
Add to Album
Edit
Enter Event Name
Calendar
Slideshow
Copy Photos
Delete Photos
Edit
OK
RETURN
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 62 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Photo
VQT3C73
63
[HDD]
1 While selecting album label:
Select “Remove from Album” in “Edit”,
then press [OK].
2 Select “Yes”, then press [OK].
[HDD]
While selecting album label:
Select “Enter Album Name” in “Edit, then
press [OK].
(> 76, Entering text)
Select “Enter Event Name” in “Edit”, then
press [OK].
(> 76, Entering text)
[BD-RE] [RAM] [SD]
1 While selecting photo:
Select “Set up Protection” or “Cancel
Protection”, then press [OK].
2 Select “Yes”, then press [OK].
appears when the protection is set.
Even if the protection is set, the photo may be deleted by
another unit.
1 While selectingAll” or “2D” label:
Select “Delete Photos”, then press [OK].
2 Select “Yes”, then press [OK].
Remove from Album
Enter Album name
Enter Event Name
Changing protection
Deleting
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 63 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Photo
VQT3C73
64
Copying photos
2 Select the event or the photo, then
press the “Yellow” button.
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step.
e.g., [SD]
Press the “Yellow” button again to cancel.
3 Press the “Blue” button.
4 Select the copying destination, then
press [OK].
5 When copy to HDD:
Select “Yes” or “No”, then press [OK].
If you select “Yes”:
Select the album, then press [OK].
You can categorise and manage the events and
photos on the HDD by copying to the album.
(> 60)
6 Select “Yes”, then press [OK].
Copying starts.
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.
The name of the copied photos will be changed.
If the number of files/folders to be copied exceeds the maximum
(> 111), copying will stop partway through.
Selecting and copying the
photos
[HDD] > [BD-RE] [RAM] [SD]
[BD-RE] [RAM] [DVD-R] [CD] > [HDD] [SD]
[SD] [USB] > [HDD] [BD-RE] [RAM]
1
[HDD]
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Select “Photo” in “Playback
Contents”, then press [OK].
[BD-RE] [RAM] [DVD-R] [CD] [SD] [USB]
1 Insert a disc, the SD card or USB
memory.
e.g., [SD]
2 Select “View Photos”, then press
[OK].
SD Card
OK
RETURN
SD card is inserted.
Play Video ( AVCHD )
View Photos
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Copy New Photos
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Page
SelectSlideshow
PHOTO
OPTION
001_AAA
0001/0001
Copy
OK
RETURN
4
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
Folder Name Photos
2D
SD card
3D
HDD Album Selection
Please select the destination album.
Album 1 Album 2 Album 3 Album 4
Copy Photos
OK
RETURN
HDDSD card
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 64 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Photo
VQT3C73
65
[BD-RE] [RAM] [DVD-R] [CD] [SD] [USB] > [HDD]
Newly added photos will automatically be copied to the
HDD.
1 While stopped
Insert a disc, an SD card or an USB
memory.
e.g., [SD]
2 Select “Copy New Photos”, then press
[OK].
3 Select “Yes”, then press [OK].
Copying starts.
4 Once the copy is completed, select
“Yes” or “No”, then press [OK].
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.
Photos without shooting date will be categorised using the creation date.
If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number of
files/folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (> 111), copying will
stop partway through.
The name of the copied photos will be changed.
Copying automatically
SD Card
OK
RETURN
SD card is inserted.
Play Video ( AVCHD )
View Photos
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Copy New Photos
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Yes No
Start copying ?
Copy New Photos
OK
RETURN
HDDSD card
Timer recording or Ext Link recording cannot start
during copying.
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 65 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Music
VQT3C73
66
Playing music/Copying music to HDD
Music
To play other music (track)
Select the item, then press [OK].
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.
The track/artist name will be displayed if the information is contained in
ID3 tag of the MP3 file.
If there is a large amount of photo data etc. within a MP3 file, play may
not be possible.
While copying, no other operations can be performed. Timer recordings
will not proceed.
The maximum number of tracks on HDD: 40000
(Depends on the remaining capacity.)
[BST800] When “Pure Sound mode” is activated, some functions
(Gracenote
®
Database, Copy music to HDD, etc.) are unusable during
playback music CD. (> 87)
About the Gracenote
®
Database
If the title is not in the built-in database, it is possible to
acquire the title automatically by connecting to the network
via the Internet. (> 16, 23)
If there are music CDs with very similar title information,
then the incorrect title information may be obtained. If no
title suggestions are found, enter the music CD title
information manually after recording to the HDD has
completed.
MP3
1 While the Track List is displayed
Press [OPTION].
2 Select “Select Folder”, then press [OK].
3 Select the folder, then press [OK].
§
§
[DVD-R] only
Music CD: All tracks in the CD will be recorded.
MP3: All tracks in the folder will be recorded.
(Cannot record track-by-track.)
It will be recorded as 1 album to the HDD in 1 recording.
While stopped
Music CD
Insert a disc.
The unit starts accessing the Gracenote
®
Database and searches for the title information.
If search results indicate that multiple titles
were found
Select the appropriate title, then press [OK].
Playback will automatically start.
MP3
1 Insert a disc or USB
memory.
[DVD-R] [CD] Playback will automatically
start if only MP3 is recorded.
2 Select “Play / Copy Music
( MP3 )”, then press [OK].
Playback will start.
To copy music to HDD
1 Press the “Blue” button.
2 Select “Copy”, then press
[OK].
Copying starts.
POWERED BY
e.g., [USB]
USB
OK
RETURN
USB device is inserted.
View Photos
Play Video
Play / Copy Music ( MP3 )
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Copy New Photos
Using the tree screen to find a folder
Slideshow Copy All
to HDD
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
0.09
OK
RETURN
No.
Track Name Artist
Track List
OPTION
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
CD ( MP3 )
Playing track
e.g., [CD] (MP3)
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
CD ( MP3 )
Select Folder
0.09
RETURN
F
OK
5 / 12
Selected folder No. /Total folder
If the folder has no track, “–” is displayed as
folder number.
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 66 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Music
VQT3C73
67
[HDD]
1 When the HDD is selected
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Select “Music” in “Playback Contents”,
then press [OK].
3 Select the item, then press [OK].
1 Categorised by artist
2 Categorised by album
3 Tracks registered in “My Favourites”
4 Tracks registered in “Playlists”
5 Tracks most often played recently (up to 30 tracks)
6 Random playback of all tracks
When “Artists” is selected
1 Select the initial of the artist.
2 Select the name of the artist, then press [OK].
3 Select the album, then press [OK].
When “Albums” is selected
1 Select the initial of the album.
2 Select the album, then press [OK].
When “Playlists” is selected
Select the playlist, then press [OK].
4 Select the track, then press [OK].
1
While the DIRECT NAVIGATOR (Music Menu) screen
is displayed
Press the “Red” button.
2 Select “VIDEO” or “PHOTO”, then press
[OK].
Playing music recorded on
HDD
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
Music Menu MUSIC
OK
RETURN
Please select to access music.
Artists
Frequently Played
Albums
Total Tracks 53
HDD
Random Play
My Favourites
OPTION
Playlists
VIDEO / PHOTO
Artists
My Favourites
Frequently Played
Random Play
Albums
Playlists
Switching to the VIDEO or PHOTO
screens
Slideshow Add to My
Favourites
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
0.09 4.30
OK
RETURN
No.
Track Name Artist
Track List
OPTION
HDD
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
Playing track
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
Music Menu MUSIC
OK
RETURN
Please select to access music.
Artists
Frequently Played
Albums
Total Tracks 53
HDD
Random Play
My Favourites
OPTION
Playlists
VIDEO / PHOTO
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 67 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Music
VQT3C73
68
Playing music/Copying music to HDD
[HDD] [DVD-R] [CD] [USB]
[HDD] [DVD-R] [CD] [USB]
[HDD]
While the Track List screen is displayed
Select the track, then press the “Green
button.
Up to 99 tracks can be registered.
[HDD]
While the Track List screen is displayed
1 Select the track.
2 Press [OPTION].
3 Select “Information”, then press [OK].
Refer to “Repeat Play” or “Random” in Play menu (> 82).
Refer to “Sound Effects” in Sound menu (> 83).
Photos stored on the “Album” of the HDD can be played
back as slideshow during playback of the music.
While playing the music
Press the “Red” button.
To change the photos to display
1 While slideshow playing
Press [OPTION].
2 Select “Select Photo Album”, then press [OK].
3 Select the album, then press [OK].
e.g.,
To end the slideshow
Press [RETURN ].
¾ How to create the photo album (> 62, Add to Album)
¾ To play music continuously even if the Power off link
works (> 78)
Operations during music play
Stop Press [STOP ].
Pause Press [PAUSE ;].
Press [PAUSE ;] again or [PLAY/a1.3 1] to
restart play.
Search Press [SLOW/SEARCH 6] or
[SLOW/SEARCH 5].
Press [PLAY/a1.3 1] to restart play.
Skip During play or while paused, press
[SKIP :] or [SKIP 9].
Useful functions during music
play
Registering a track to the “My
Favourites”
Information
Repeat Play
Random
Sound Effects
Displaying photos (Slideshow)
Please select the album to start slideshow.
RETURN
OK
While playing music a photo slideshow
can be displayed.
Select Photo Album
Sample Photos
Album 1
Album 2
Album 3
Album 4
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 68 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Music
VQT3C73
69
Editing music/playlist
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Select “Music” in “Playback Contents”,
then press [OK].
When doing “Delete All Tracks”, “Clear My
Favourites” or “Clear Frequently Played” (> go to
step 4).
3 Select the item, then press [OK].
4 Press [OPTION].
5 Select the item, then press [OK].
e.g., while selecting “Albums
While displaying the “Music Menu” screen
1 Select “Delete All Tracks”, then press
[OK].
2 Select “Yes”, then press [OK].
3 Select “Delete”, then press [OK].
While displaying the “Artists” screen
1 Select “Delete All Tracks”, then press
[OK].
2 Select “Delete”, then press [OK].
While displaying the “Album View” or “Albums
screen
1 Select “Delete Album”, then press [OK].
2 Select “Delete”, then press [OK].
While displaying the “Track List” screen
1 Select “Delete”, then press [OK].
2 Select “Delete”, then press [OK].
Select “Edit Album Name”, “Edit Track
Name”, “Edit Artist Name” or “Edit Playlist
Name”, then press [OK].
(> 76, Entering text)
Tracks themselves are not deleted from the HDD.
While displaying the “Playlists” screen
1 Select “Remove All Tracks”, then press
[OK].
2 Select “Remove”, then press [OK].
While displaying the “Music Menu” screen
1 Select “Clear My Favourites” or “Clear
Frequently Played”, then press [OK].
2 Select “Clear”, then press [OK].
While displaying the “My Favourites”, “Track List” of
“Playlists” or “Frequently Played” screen
1 Select “Remove”, then press [OK].
2 Select “Remove”, then press [OK].
The selected track is removed.
You can register your favourite albums and tracks into
10 preset playlists.
1 Select “Add to Playlist”, then press [OK].
2 Select the playlist, then press [OK].
New playlist cannot be added.
Up to 999 tracks can be registered to each playlist.
Deleting all tracks
Deleting albums
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
Music Menu MUSIC
OK
RETURN
Please select to access music.
Artists
Frequently Played
Albums
Total Tracks 53
HDD
Random Play
My Favourites
OPTION
Playlists
VIDEO / PHOTO
Add to Playlist
Edit Album Name
Playback Settings
Delete Album
Deleting
Editing the name
Removing all tracks
Removing tracks
Add to playlist
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 69 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
With Other Equipment
VQT3C73
70
Recording from external equipment
With Other
Equipment
It will be recorded in Standard Definition quality even if the programme is
in High Definition quality.
Recording media: [HDD]
Recording mode: XP, SP, LP, EP
Preparation
Connect the Set Top Box or video equipment (> 15)
1 While stopped
Press [INPUT SELECT] and select the
input channel, then press [OK].
e.g., If you have connected to AV2 input terminals,
select “AV2”.
2 Press [REC MODE] to select the
recording mode.
3 If recording broadcasts from Set Top Box:
Select the channel on the Set Top Box.
If recording from other video equipment:
Start play on the video equipment.
4 Press [REC ¥].
Recording starts.
5 Set the time to record. (> 32)
To skip unwanted parts
Press [PAUSE ;] to pause recording.
Press [PAUSE ;] again to restart recording.
To stop recording
Press [STOP ].
§
This function is not available with DVD-R DL and +R DL.
Preparation
Connect the Set Top Box or video equipment (> 15)
1 While stopped
Press [INPUT SELECT] and select the
input channel, then press [OK].
e.g., If you have connected to AV2 input terminals,
select “AV2”.
2 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
3 Select “Flexible Recording via AV
input” in “Others”, then press [OK].
4 Select “Hour” and “Min.” and set the
recording time.
5 Start play on the other equipment.
6 Select “Start”, then press [OK].
To stop recording partway
Press [STOP ].
To show the remaining time
Press [STATUS ].
Manual Recording
REC1/OTR
Recording Time
Automatic Stop
Continuous recording
30 min
Input AV2
Flexible Recording via AV input
Recording media:
[HDD] [BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM] [DVD-R]
§
[DVD-RW] [+R]
§
[+RW]
Recording mode: FR
RETURN
OK
Flexible Recording via AV input
Please set recording time. Record in FR mode.
Maximum recording time
Set recording time
Hour
8
Min.
00
Start
Cancel
8 hour 00 min.
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 70 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
With Other Equipment
VQT3C73
71
Recording media: [HDD]
Recording mode: XP, SP, LP, EP
Connect the equipment with AV2 input terminal (> 15).
Set “AV2 Input” and “Ext Link” (> 92).
Make timer programming on the external equipment.
Press [EXT LINK].
EXT-L” lights on the unit’s display
To cancel the External link
1 Turn on this unit.
2 Press [EXT LINK] to stop recording or to cancel linked
timer recording standby. (“EXT-L” disappears.)
It will be recorded in standard definition quality even if the programme is
in high definition.
During Ext Link Standby mode or recording, you cannot select external
input other than AV2.
This function does not work when “TV System” is set to “NTSC” (> 91).
This function does not work while recording 2 programmes
simultaneously with timer recording.
The beginnings of recordings may not be recorded correctly in some
cases.
Programmes are recorded as one title on this unit when the end time of
the earlier timer recording and the start time of the later timer recording
are close to each other.
To divide the titles, go to “Dividing title” (> 49).
Linked timer recording (SKY
Digital STB, etc.)–EXT LINK
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 71 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
With Other Equipment
VQT3C73
72
Copying the HD Video or the SD Video
e.g., Connecting to the Panasonic video camera
It is possible to copy the HD video (AVCHD format) recorded
on the Panasonic video camera, etc. to the HDD or disc.
[BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM] [DVD-R] [DVD-RW] [+R] [+RW] > [HDD]
[SD] [USB], video camera, etc. > [HDD] [BD-RE] [BD-R]
2 Select “Copy Video ( AVCHD )”, then
press [OK].
3 When copying from an SD card or video
equipment
Select “Copy to HDD” or “Copy to
Blu-ray Disc”, then press [OK].
4 Select the title, then press the “Yellow”
button.
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step.
Press the “Yellow” button again to cancel.
(All the recordings on the same date become a title.)
5 Press [OK].
6 Select “Start”, then press [OK].
It will automatically format the unformatted disc, such
as a new disc.
It may take time for the copying to start.
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.
¾ Copying HD Video (AVCHD format) from HDD (> 58)
Copy cannot be executed while recording or playback.
An AVCHD title with 100 or more scenes will be divided into titles every
99th scene and copied.
USB connection cable
(specified cable such as accessories of
the USB equipment)
Copying HD Video
(AVCHD format)
1
From video equipment
Connect the video camera.
Make the video camera ready for data transfer
on the video camera.
From a disc or an SD card
Insert a disc or SD card.
e.g., [SD]
SD Card
OK
RETURN
SD card is inserted.
Play Video ( AVCHD )
View Photos
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Copy New Photos
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 72 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
With Other Equipment
VQT3C73
73
It is possible to copy the SD video (MPEG2 format) recorded
on the Panasonic video camera, etc. to the HDD or disc.
[SD] [USB], video camera, etc. > [HDD] [RAM]
2 Select “Copy Video ( MPEG2 )”, then
press [OK].
3 Select “Start Copying”, then press [OK].
To change the copy destination and the titles to copy
(> 54)
4 Select “Yes”, then press [OK] to start
copying.
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.
You cannot playback SD Video on an SD card or in the HDD of the
Panasonic video camera, etc. with this unit. You must copy the files to
the HDD or a DVD-RAM.
You cannot playback or record while copying SD Video.
Copying SD Video
(MPEG2 format)
1
From video equipment
Connect the video camera.
Select the appropriate mode that makes the
video camera ready for data transfer on the
video camera.
From an SD card
Insert an SD card.
e.g.,
SD Card
OK
RETURN
SD card is inserted.
Play Video ( AVCHD )
View Photos
Copy Video ( AVCHD )
Copy New Photos
Copy Video ( MPEG2 )
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 73 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Convenient functions
VQT3C73
74
Media management
Convenient
functions
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Select “Others”, then press [OK].
3 Select the item, then press [OK].
Selectable items will change depending on the
selected drive.
[BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM] [DVD-R] [DVD-RW] [+R] [+RW]
Select “Disc Name”, then press [OK].
(> 76, Entering text)
The disc name is displayed in the Blu-ray Disc
Management/DVD Management window.
[DVD-R] [DVD-RW] [+R] With a finalised disc, the name is
displayed on the Top Menu.
[+RW] The disc name is displayed only if you play the disc
on other equipment after creating Top Menu.
Do not perform this operation before copying HD Video (AVCHD format)
to DVD-R or DVD-R DL. (> 58)
[BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM]
1 Select “Disc Protection”, then press [OK].
2 Select “Yes”, then press [OK].
To release the protection
Repeat steps 12.
The screen icon will be switched to “Off”.
[BD-RE] [BD-R] [RAM]
1 Select “Delete all titles”, then press [OK].
2 Select “Yes”, then press [OK].
3 Select “Start”, then press [OK].
A message appears when finished.
4 Press [OK].
Photo data (JPEG/MPO) or computer data cannot be deleted.
[BD-RE] [RAM] [DVD-RW] [+RW] [SD]
[BD-R] [+R] (New disc only)
Formatting deletes all contents (including computer
data), and they cannot be restored. Check carefully
before proceeding.
The contents are deleted when you format a disc or card
even if you have set protection.
1 Select “Format Disc” or “Format Card”,
then press [OK].
2 Select “Yes”, then press [OK].
3 Select “Start”, then press [OK].
4 Press [OK].
[RAM] To stop formatting
Press [RETURN ].
You can cancel formatting if it takes more than 2 minutes.
The disc must be reformatted if you do this.
[RAM] Formatting normally takes a few minutes; however, it may take up
to a maximum of 70 minutes.
Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while formatting. This can
render the disc or the card unusable.
When a disc or card has been formatted using this unit, it may not be
possible to use it on any other equipment.
It will become DVD Video format when a DVD-RW recorded in DVD
Video Recording format is formatted with this unit.
Providing a name for a disc
Setting the protection
Files
1
Time Remaining 5:38 EP
Blu-ray Disc Management
BD-RE
01
Mouse
02
Cattle
On
Disc Name
Delete all titles
Disc Protection
e.g., when the disc is write-protected
Delete all titles
Format
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 74 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Convenient functions
VQT3C73
75
[DVD-R] [DVD-RW] [+R] [+RW]
You can select the background for DVD-Video Top Menu.
1 Select “Top Menu”, then press [OK].
2 Select the background, then press [OK].
You can change thumbnails displayed in the Top Menu. (> 49,
Changing thumbnail)
[DVD-R] [DVD-RW] [+R] [+RW]
You can select whether to show the Top Menu after finalising
or creating Top Menu ([+RW]).
1 Select “Auto-Play Select”, then press
[OK].
2 Select “Top Menu” or “Title 1”, then press
[OK].
[DVD-R] [DVD-RW] [+R]
You can play the disc on compatible DVD players by
finalising it on the unit.
[BD-R]
Finalising BD-R prevents accidental recording or editing.
1 Select “Finalise”, then press [OK].
2 Select “Yes”, then press [OK].
3 Select “Start”, then press [OK].
4 Press [OK].
After finalising
[BD-R] [DVD-R] [+R] The disc becomes play-only and you
can no longer record or edit.
[DVD-RW] You can record and edit the disc after
formatting (> 74).
You cannot cancel finalising.
Finalising takes up to 15 minutes (Up to 60 minutes in case of
DVD-R DL and +R DL).
Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while finalising. This can
render the disc unusable.
When finalising a high-speed recording compatible disc, it may take
longer than displayed on the confirmation screen (approximately four
times longer).
You cannot finalise discs recorded on other manufacturer’s equipment.
[DVD-R] [DVD-RW] [+R] If you finalise discs recorded on Panasonic
equipment other than this unit, the background selected as “Top Menu”
may not be displayed.
Discs finalised on this unit may not be playable on other players due to
the condition of the recording.
[+RW]
You can create Top Menu for displaying on other equipment.
Make selections from “Top Menu” and “Auto-Play Select”
(> left) before creating Top Menu.
1 Select “Create Top Menu”, then press
[OK].
2 Select “Yes”, then press [OK].
3 Select “Start”, then press [OK].
Creating Top Menu starts. You cannot cancel creating.
Creating Top Menu can take a few minutes.
4 Press [OK].
You cannot use the Top Menu for playing on this unit.
The created menu is deleted when you record or edit the disc.
[HDD]
If you no longer need BD-Live data recorded on the HDD,
you can delete data with the following operation.
1 Select “Delete BD-Video data”, then press
[OK].
2 Select “Yes”, then press [OK].
3 Select “Start”, then press [OK].
4 Press [OK].
Top Menu
Auto-Play Select
Top Menu The Top Menu appears first.
Title 1 The disc content is played without
displaying the Top Menu.
Finalise
1
4
7 8
5
2
9
6
3
Top Menu List
01
Display after finalising
Title Name
Thumbnail
(Still picture)
Create Top Menu
Delete BD-Video data
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 75 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Convenient functions
VQT3C73
76
Entering text
Preparation
Show the Enter Title Name screen.
1 Select a character, then press [OK].
Repeat this step to enter other characters.
To delete a character
Select the character in the name field, then
press [PAUSE ;].
To enter characters with number buttons
e.g., entering the letter “R
2 Press [STOP ] (Set).
“Writing...” appears then the screen returns to the
DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen and so on.
To end partway
Press [RETURN ].
Text is not added.
For your reference
The name of the DVD-Video that will be displayed in the Top
Menu after finalisation is previewed.
The maximum number of characters depends on the media.
If a name is long, parts of it may not be shown in some screens.
1 Press [7] to move
to the 7th row.
2 Press [7] twice to
highlight “R”.
3 Press [OK].
_
Enter Title Name
Space
Set
Delete
Top Menu Preview
( DVD-Video )
OK
RETURN
Standard Characters Other Characters
Name field: shows the text you have
entered
Press the “Red” button or “Green” button to
select character type and press [OK].
5
6
8
NO
JKL
M
PQR
TUV
7
7
qrs
p
7
qrs
p
7
qrs
p
Chapter1_
Enter Title Name
12345
ABC a
DEF d
GH I
NO
g
JKL j
M
m
67890
bc
ef / %
hi $
*
&
kl@
n ]
_
o[
PQRSp
TUV t
qrs( )
{}
-
Top Menu Preview
( DVD-Video )
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Set
Delete
Chapter 1
Standard Characters Other Characters
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 76 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Convenient functions
VQT3C73
77
Enjoying VIERA CAST
You can access a selection of Internet services from the
Home screen with VIERA CAST, such as YouTube, Picasa
Web Albums. (Current as of May 2011)
Preparation
Network connection (> 16)
Network Easy Setting (> 23, 93)
To enjoy video communication (e.g., Skype
TM
)
Connect this unit with optional Communication Camera
(TY-CC10W or compatible equipment).
Depending on the area, this optional camera may not
be available. Please consult your local Panasonic
dealer for advice.
[BST700] [BST 701] When this unit is connected by
wireless LAN connection, connect the
Communication Camera via the USB port on the front
of this unit.
For operating method refer to the following website.
http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/
(This site is in English only.)
Cannot be used while recording, copying or playing BD-
Video.
1 Press [VIERA CAST].
The message is displayed. Please read these
instructions carefully and then press [OK].
The video communication service can be accessed
directly by pressing [ ] button.
2 Select the item, then press [OK].
Operable buttons:
[3, 4, 2, 1], [OK], [RETURN ], coloured
buttons and number buttons.
VIERA CAST Home screen
e.g.,
Images are for illustration purpose, contents may
change without notice.
To exit from VIERA CAST
Press [EXIT].
When playing content from a disc, SD card or USB device VIERA CAST
cannot be accessed.
In the following cases, settings are possible using “Internet Content
Settings” (> 93)
When restricting the use of VIERA CAST.
When the audio is distorted.
If using slow Internet connection, the video may not be displayed
correctly. A high-speed Internet service with a speed of at least 6 Mbps
is recommended.
Be sure to update the software (firmware) when a software (firmware)
update notice is displayed on the screen.
If the software (firmware) is not updated, you will not be able to use the
VIERA CAST function.
VIERA CAST home screen is subject to change without notice.
The services through VIERA CAST are operated by their respective
service providers, and service may be discontinued either temporarily or
permanently without notice. Therefore, Panasonic will make no warranty
for the content or the continuity of the services.
All features of websites or content of the service may not be available.
Some contents may be inappropriate for some viewers.
Some contents of VIERA CAST may only be available for specific
countries and may be presented in specific languages.
If timer recording starts, VIERA CAST will stop.
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
L
R
AUDIO
VIDEO
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
OUT
IN 1IN 1
IN 2IN 2
LNB 13V/ 18V 400mA max
COMMUNICATION
CAMERA
MAINMAIN
SUBSUB
Communication Camera
TY-CC10W
This unit’s rear panel
e.g.,
Featured Videos
Setup & Help
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXX
MORE
BACK
Featured Photos
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 77 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Convenient functions
VQT3C73
78
VIERA Link/Q Link functions
Preparation
1 Connect this unit to your TV or receiver using an HDMI
cable. (> 14)
2 Set “VIERA Link” to “On” (> 92). (The default setting is
“On”.)
3 Set the “HDAVI Control” operations on the connected
equipment (e.g., TV).
Set the input channel on the VIERA to suit the
terminal to be used as “HDAVI Control”.
4 Turn on all “HDAVI Control” compatible equipment, then
select this unit’s input channel on the connected TV so
that the “HDAVI Control” function works properly.
Also when the connection or settings are changed,
repeat this procedure.
Preparation
Connect this unit to your TV with a fully wired 21-pin Scart
cable. (> 17)
For your reference
The following systems from other manufacturers have
similar functions to Q Link from Panasonic.
For details, refer to your TV’s operating instructions or
consult your dealer.
Q Link (registered trademark of Panasonic)
DATA LOGIC (registered trademark of Metz)
Easy Link (registered trademark of Philips)
Megalogic (registered trademark of Grundig)
SMARTLINK (registered trademark of Sony)
(VIERA]Link) (Q]Link)
When the following operations are performed, the TV
will automatically switch the input channel and display the
corresponding action. Additionally when the TV is off, the TV
will automatically turn on.
When play starts on the unit
When an action that uses DIRECT NAVIGATOR or
FUNCTION MENU etc, is performed
(VIERA]Link) (Q]Link)
When you set the TV to standby mode, the unit is also
automatically set to standby mode.
Power off link function does not work when recording,
copying etc.
(VIERA]Link)
The following operations make it possible to keep the power
of the unit on and to play music continuously.
When the unit is directly connected to an amplifier/receiver.
1 While playing music
Press [OPTION].
2 Select “TV Power Off”, then press [OK].
Sound may be discontinued for several seconds when the
power to the TV is turned off.
(VIERA]Link)
You can operate this unit with the TV remote control.
Refer to “PAUSE LIVE TV” on page 30.
(VIERA]Link) (Q]Link)
This function allows you to immediately start recording the
programme that you are viewing on the TV.
Refer to the TV operating instructions for operation.
This unit will record the programmes in DR mode once,
and then automatically convert to the selected recording
mode while this unit is in standby. (> 31)
What is VIERA Link “HDAVI Control”?
VIERA Link “HDAVI Control” is a convenient function
that offers linked operations of this unit, and a
Panasonic TV (VIERA) or receiver under “HDAVI
Control”. You can use this function by connecting the
equipment with the HDMI cable. See the operating
instructions for connected equipment for operational
details.
What is Q Link?
Q Link is a convenient function that offers linked
operations of this unit and a Panasonic TV. You can
use this function by connecting the equipment with a
fully wired 21-pin Scart cable.
Automatic input switching
Power on link
Power off link
Playing music continuously even
after turning off power to the TV
§1
PAUSE LIVE TV
§2
Direct TV Recording
§2
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 78 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Convenient functions
VQT3C73
79
(VIERA]Link)
You can operate this unit using the TV remote control.
Refer to the operating instructions of the TV about the
buttons that you can use.
Control Panel
Using the Control Panel, you can operate with the TV
remote control.
Select “Control Panel” from the OPTION menu.
§1
This function is available with the TV that supports
“HDAVI Control 2” or later.
§2
This function is available with the TV that supports
“HDAVI Control 3” or later.
[BST800] VIERA Link “HDAVI Control” can only be used on the
connection from the HDMI (MAIN) terminal.
This unit supports “HDAVI Control 5” function.
“HDAVI Control 5” is the newest standard (current as of December,
2010) for Panasonic HDAVI Control compatible equipment. This
standard is compatible with Panasonic’s conventional HDAVI equipment.
Please refer to individual manuals for other manufacturers’ equipment
supporting VIERA Link function.
VIERA Link “HDAVI Control”, based on the control functions provided by
HDMI which is an industry standard known as HDMI CEC (Consumer
Electronics Control), is a unique function that we have developed and
added. As such, its operation with other manufacturers’ equipment that
supports HDMI CEC cannot be guaranteed.
These functions may not work normally depending on the equipment
condition.
About “HDAVI Control” function, read the manual of the connected
equipment (e.g., TV) too.
Use the remote control supplied with this unit if you cannot operate this
unit using buttons on the TV remote control.
The operation of this unit may be interrupted when you press
incompatible buttons on the TV remote control.
Easy control only with VIERA remote
control
§1
Using the OPTION menu
1 Press [OPTION] on the TV
remote control.
2 Select the item, then press
[OK].
e.g.,
Digital TV Menu
Playback Menu
Control Panel
Drive Select
Aspect
FUNCTION MENU
Switch to TV
OK
RETURN
Exit
Control Panel
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 79 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Convenient functions
VQT3C73
80
Playing contents from other equipment (Server)
You can enjoy the video and photos saved on the HDD of
this unit on DLNA (Client) compatible equipment connected
via a network.
The titles with remote access restriction (e.g., copy
restriction) signals sent from broadcasters are not
available for this function.
You cannot playback music from the playback equipment
(Client).
e.g.,
For details regarding the connection and operation of
equipment connected via a network, refer to their respective
operating instructions.
Preparation
Network connection (> 16)
Network Easy Setting (> 23, 93)
When DLNA (Server) Function is deactivated, make the
settings. (> 94, Home Network ( DLNA ) Server Settings)
1 Operate the playback equipment
(Client) to display the list of titles on
this unit.
Refer to their respective operating instructions.
2 Select the item to playback (folder),
then press [OK].
Ensure that the router for your home network has adequate security
system to prevent unauthorized access.
The DLNA compatible device that is to be connected to the unit should
be connected to the same hub or broadband router as the unit.
Files not on the HDD cannot be played back.
Playing back 3D video recorded on this unit may not work properly.
Editing is not possible.
Following titles can not be played back:
– A title with remote access restriction
– A title with copy protection (Copying is prohibited) (> 13)
– A title currently being recorded on this unit
– A title with audio only format
– A title with incompatible format
– A title is encrypted
Playback via DLNA compatible equipment may not be performed when
this unit is in the following conditions:
– While simultaneously recording 2 programmes
– While playing back a BD-Video
– While simultaneously performing High speed copy and recording
– While displaying the Setup menu
– While executing functions using a network, such as “VIERA CAST”
There may be some video that cannot be played back on DLNA
compatible equipment depending on the equipment.
You cannot playback simultaneously from 2 or more items of DLNA
compatible equipment.
This unit (Server)
LAN cable
Wireless router, etc.
DLNA compatible equipment
(Client)
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 80 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Convenient functions
VQT3C73
81
Playing contents on other equipment (Client)
You can enjoy viewing video, photos and music saved on a
DLNA Certified media server (such as a PC with Windows 7
installed etc.) connected via a network with this unit. You
also can enjoy viewing them with Panasonic DLNA
compatible recorders (DIGA).
e.g.,
Preparation
Network connection (> 16)
Network Easy Setting (> 23, 93)
Perform Home Network settings of the DLNA compatible
equipment (Server).
When connected to a PC with Windows 7 installed
Add the contents and folder to the Windows Media
®
Player library.
Playlist of Windows Media
®
Player can play back only the
contents that are stored in the libraries.
Regarding setting method of Windows 7 refer to its
instructions or help.
When connected to a Panasonic DLNA compatible
recorder (DIGA)
When a message requesting operation of the equipment
to be registered is displayed, perform steps 1–4.
The countries where DIGA is available are limited.
Refer to following site for availability.
http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Select “Home Network (DLNA)” in
“Network”, then press [OK].
A list of equipment connected via the network is
displayed.
This list can be updated by pressing the “Red
button.
3 Select the equipment to playback the
contents, then press [OK].
4 Select the item to playback (folder),
then press [OK].
Menu structure will be different depending on the
equipment connected to this unit. Select the
contents by repeating the operation.
Convenient functions can be used by pressing
[OPTION] depending on the contents.
You may not be able to use the Control Panel even if you use the
Panasonic DLNA compatible equipment.
Depending on the contents and the connected equipment, playback may
not be possible.
While playing back the 3D programme, you cannot set “3D Settings”.
(> 46)
Items displayed in grey on the display cannot be played back by this
unit.
Depending on the performance of the connected PC, video frames may
be dropped during playback, or video may not playback at all. (> 105)
For details about the setting and operation method of
connected equipment, and compatible equipment,
refer to the following Website and the operating
instructions for each item of equipment.
http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/
(This site is in English only.)
This unit (Client)
Wireless router, etc.
DLNA compatible equipment (Server)
LAN cable
Control Panel
Control Panel is displayed
once the playback starts.
Operation can be performed
with [3, 4, 2, 1], [OK]
and [EXIT].
Press [OK] if the Control
Panel is not displayed.
Press [RETURN ] to
hide the Control Panel.
Servers found on the network are displayed.
Please select one.
Home Network (DLNA)
Update
OK
RETURN
e.g.
Exit
e.g.
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 81 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Convenient functions
VQT3C73
82
Playback menu
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Select “Playback Settings” in “Playback
Menu” or select “Playback Settings”, then
press [OK].
e.g.,
The menu is not displayed when playing photos.
3 Select the menu, then press [1] (right).
4 Select the item, then press [1] (right).
5 Select the setting.
Some items can be changed by pressing [OK].
To clear the Playback menu
Press [EXIT].
Depending on the condition of the unit (playing,
stopped, etc.) and media contents, there may be some
items that you cannot select or change.
§
With some discs, you may only be able to make changes
using the menus (> 39) on the disc.
Audio attribute
Language
Common procedures
Disc menu—Setting the disc content
Video
The original video recording method (MPEG-4 AVC etc.)
appears.
Signal Type
Primary Video
Video The original video recording method
appears.
Soundtrack Select the type of audio or language.
Secondary Video
Video Select on/off of images.
The original video recording method
appears.
Soundtrack Select on/off of audio and the language.
Soundtrack
§
Show or change the soundtrack.
Subtitles
§
Turn the subtitle on/off, and change the language
depending on the media.
Disc
Play
Picture
Sound
Other
Angle
1
Soundtrack
1 2/0 ch
Subtitles
Off
-
Menu Item Setting
Multi Audio
Switch in the case of multiple audio.
Subtitle Language
Select the subtitle language in the case of multiple
languages.
Subtitle Style
Select the subtitle style recorded on the disc.
Angle
§
Change the number to select an angle.
Audio Channel
Change audio (LR/L/R) during playback.
Signal type
k (kHz): Sampling frequency
b (bit): Number of bits
ch (channel): Number of channels
ENG:
FRA:
DEU:
ITA:
ESP:
NLD:
SVE:
NOR:
English
French
German
Italian
Spanish
Dutch
Swedish
Norwegian
DAN:
POR:
RUS:
JPN:
CHI:
KOR:
MAL:
VIE:
Danish
Portuguese
Russian
Japanese
Chinese
Korean
Malay
Vietnamese
THA:
POL:
CES:
SLK:
HUN:
FIN:
¢:
Thai
Polish
Czech
Slovak
Hungarian
Finnish
Others
Play menu—Change the play
sequence
Repeat Play
(Only when the elapsed time is being displayed on the
unit’s display.)
Select the item which you want to repeat. The items
displayed differ depending on the type of media.
Select “Off” to cancel.
Random
(Only when playing music)
Select whether to play random or not.
Graphic Display Level
You can change the pop-up level of the playback settings
display, etc., during the 3D playback.
This function is not available when “3D Type” is set to
“Side by side”. (> 91)
LPCM/ Digital/ Digital+/
TrueHD/DTS/DTS-HD/MPEG:
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 82 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Convenient functions
VQT3C73
83
Picture menu—Change the picture
quality
Mode
Select the picture quality mode during play.
Normal Default setting
Soft Soft picture with fewer video artifacts
Fine Details are sharper
Cinema Mellows movies, enhances detail in dark
scenes.
Cartoon A mode suitable for viewing animations.
Advanced Settings
HD optimizer It will compensate the mosaic noise in the
video and haze around the characters
precisely.
Chroma
Process
You can enjoy high definition and full
texture video by processing the HDMI
colour signals in high precision during
playback.
Detail Clarity The picture becomes sharp and detailed.
Super
Resolution
Standard picture quality video is corrected
to sharp and crisp picture quality when it
is output as 1080i/1080p from the HDMI
terminal.
Progressive
Select the method of conversion for progressive output to
suit the type of title being played. (> 117)
Auto Automatically detects the film and video
content, and appropriately converts it.
Video Select when using “Auto”, and the content
is distorted.
Film
Select this if the
edges of the film
content appear
jagged or rough
when “Auto” is
selected. However,
if the video content is distorted as shown
in the illustration to the right, then select
“Auto”.
Sound menu—Change the sound
effect
Sound Effects
This function is effective when “Digital Audio Output” is
set to “PCM”. (> 90)
Digital Tube
Sound
[BST800]
You can enjoy a warm sound as though
connected to a vacuum tube amplifier.
Re-master 1
Re-master 2
(Discs recorded at 48 kHz or less)
Sound becomes more natural by adding
higher frequency signals not recorded on
the track.
Dialogue Enhancer
The volume of the centre channel is raised to make
dialogue easier to hear.
Other menu—Change the display
position
Position
Change where this menu screen appears on your TV.
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 83 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Convenient functions
VQT3C73
84
Changing the units settings
You can change the unit’s settings using the Setup menu.
The settings remain intact even if you switch the unit to
standby.
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Select “Setup” in “Others”, then press
[OK].
3 Select the menu, then press [OK].
4 Select the item, then press [OK].
5 Select the option, then press [OK].
Follow the instruction on the screen if the operation
method is different.
Depending on the connection or the status of this
unit some items cannot be selected or changed.
About the PIN
PIN is required to change the following settings. Enter the
4-digit PIN following the on-screen instructions.
The PIN is common for the following items.
BD-Video Parental Control
DVD-Video Parental Control
Lock (Internet Content Settings)
PIN can be changed via the “PIN Entry” in “Others”. (> 95)
1 Select the number, then press [1] (right).
You can also use the number buttons.
2 Repeat step 1 to enter 4-digit PIN.
3 Press [OK] to confirm.
e.g., PIN Entry
Make a note of PIN in case you forget it.
Favourites Edit
You can create four favourites of channels for making
viewing and recording easier.
To select the other Favourites list
Press the “Green” button.
To add channels to the Favourites list
1 Select the channel in the “All DVB Channels” column,
then press [OK]. Repeat this step.
Red” : Select the Category.
Yellow” : Add continuous block of channels to the list at
once.
Press [3, 4] to make the block, then press [OK].
Blue” : Change the sorting mode.
To change the order of the channels list
1 Select the channel in the “Favourites” column to move,
then press the “Green button.
2 Select the new position, then press the “Green” button.
To delete channels
1 Select the channel in the “Favourites” column, then press
[OK].
Yellow”: Delete all channels.
To change the name of the Favourites list
1 Press the “Red” button in the “Favourites” column.
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a character, then press
[OK].
Repeat this step to enter other characters.
Red: Delete a character.
Blue”: Delete all characters.
3 Press [RETURN ].
Common procedures
Setup
OK
RETURN
DVB Tuning
HDD / Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
Network
Others
OK
Remember the PIN.
PIN Entry
0 0 0 0
DVB Tuning
After editing as follows, save the Favourites.
Press [RETURN ], then press [OK].
Setup
DVB Tuning
DVB Tuning
Favourites Edit
Channel List
Auto Setup
Manual Tuning
Update Channel List
Preferred Language
Signal Condition
Antenna System
LNB Configuration
Favourites Editor
Select block
Sorting 123...
123/ABCSelect favouritesSelect category
RETURN
Add
Select channel
All DVB Channels
Favourites 1
1
2
3
5
7
6
4
Channel names
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 84 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Convenient functions
VQT3C73
85
Channel List
You can edit the Channel List.
To skip unwanted channels
1 Select the channel.
2 Press [OK].
The check mark is removed.
Red : Change the Category.
“Yellow” : Clear the all skip setting.
“Blue” : Change the sorting mode.
To change the channel number assignment
1 Select the channel, then press the “Green” button.
2 Press [3, 4] to reassign the channel number.
3 Press [OK].
If another channel is already assigned to the channel
number, the two channels will be switched.
Auto Setup
You can restart the Easy Setting. (> 22)
Select the Auto Setup method.
Select “Yes”, then press [OK].
Manual Tuning
You can add each new channels manually that the Auto
Setup could not complete successfully.
Update Channel List
You can update channels to the latest one.
1 Select the method and settings.
2 Press [OK].
The unit starts searching for newly available satellite
digital channels.
“Finished” is displayed when the search is finished.
Press [RETURN ].
Search by
selected
satellite
Satellite is selected and transponders are
searched for channels.
Search all
satellites
All satellites and transponders are
searched for channels.
All DVB Channels
Sorting 123...
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
RETURN
Hide
Select
Move Reveal all 123/ABCCategory
Page up
Page down
Channel names
Search Mode
All Channels Search for all channels.
Free
Channels
Search for free channels only.
Scan Mode
Quick In this mode, scanning takes place in
a short period of time.
Full In this mode, the scanning is thorough
but takes more time.
Progress
Satellite
No.
Searching
QualityTypeChannel Name
RETURN
This will take about 10 minutes.
Update Channel List
Free TV:0 Pay TV:0
Radio:0
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 85 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Convenient functions
VQT3C73
86
Changing the unit’s settings
Signal Condition
You can check the quality and strength of signals.
Press [2, 1] to select the LNB.
Press [CH WX] to select the channel.
e.g.,
Signal Quality
Signal Strength
When the signal is too strong (red bar), reduce the signal
amplification at your aerial.
When the signal is weak:
adjust the position and direction of the dish.
check that the current digital broadcast channel is
correctly broadcasting.
Antenna System
You can receive several satellites if you have DiSEqC
control antenna system or single cable router.
1 Select “Antenna System”.
2 Press [2, 1] to select antenna system.
This unit supports DiSEqC Version 1.0.
LNB Configuration
You can set LNB setting and User Band when necessary.
If you do not know the connected satellite, select “No
Satellite” in “Satellite”. (Available satellite will be searched
in Auto Setup.)
If you select “User defined” in “Satellite”, set “Test
Transponder Frequency” manually.
Preferred Language
Select the language for multi broadcast.
If the selected language is not available, then the original
language will be selected.
Settings for Playback
¾ 3D BD-Video Playback
Select the playback method of 3D compatible video
software.
¾ Soundtrack
Select the audio language.
If “Original” is selected, the original language of each
disc will be selected.
Enter a code with the number buttons when you
select “Other ¢¢¢¢”. (> 96, Language code list)
¾ Subtitles
Select the language for subtitle.
If “Automatic” is selected and the language selected
for “Soundtrack” is not available, subtitles of that
language will automatically appear if available on that
disc.
Enter a code with the number buttons when you
select “Other ¢¢¢¢”. (> 96, Language code list)
¾ Menu
Select the language for disc menus.
Enter a code with the number buttons when you
select “Other ¢¢¢¢”. (> 96, Language code list)
Red bar The signal quality is bad.
Yellow bar The signal quality is poor.
Green bar The signal quality is good.
0 Signal strength is 0%.
10 Signal strength is 100%.
One LNB Compatible with Single LNB.
MiniDiSEqC Up to 2 LNBs can be controlled.
DiSEqC1.0 Up to 4 LNBs can be controlled.
Single Cable Compatible with single cable router.
Channel Name
Signal Condition
RETURN
Change Input
Channel Up
Channel Down
Signal Strength
10
Signal Quality
Parameter MHz,V, kS/s
Satellite
Signal Input
LNB in 1
10
0
0
HDD / Disc
Setup
HDD / Disc
HDD / Disc
Settings for Playback
Settings for Recording
HDD Management
HDD / Disc
Settings for Playback
Settings for Playback
Subtitles
Menu
Play Video ( AVCHD ) on BD-RE /BD-R
BD-Live
BD-Video Parental Control
DVD-Video Parental Control
3D BD-Video Playback
Subtitle Text
Pure Sound mode
Soundtrack
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 86 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Convenient functions
VQT3C73
87
¾ Play Video ( AVCHD ) on BD-RE / BD-R
Set when you are playing a disc that has High Definition
video (AVCHD) recorded by the Panasonic video
camera, etc. and High Definition quality title that was
recorded on this unit.
¾ BD-Live
You can restrict Internet access when BD-Live
functions are used.
If “On ( Limit )” is selected, internet access is
permitted only for BD-Live contents which have
content owner certificates.
¾ BD-Video Parental Control
Set an age limit of BD-Video play.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
PIN is required to change. (> 84)
¾ DVD-Video Parental Control
Set a rating level to limit DVD-Video play.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
PIN is required to change. (> 84)
¾ Subtitle Text
Select the language for DivX and MKV subtitles text
(> 107).
This item is displayed only after playing back a DivX
or MKV file with subtitle text.
¾ Pure Sound mode
[BST800]
You can enjoy movies or music in an environment more
suitable for viewing by stopping the rotation of the HDD
when playing back commercial BD-Videos, DVD-
Videos or music CDs.
If “On” is selected, timer recording does not start
during playback BD-Video, DVD-Video or music CD.
(> 35)
Settings for Recording
¾ Timer Record Start Buffer
This function sets the timer recording to start earlier
than the TV Guide time.
¾ Timer Record Stop Buffer
This function sets the timer recording to stop later than
the TV Guide time.
¾ REWIND LIVE TV
Turn on/off the REWIND LIVE TV function.
When “Automatic Standby” is set to “Off” (> 94), “On”
cannot be selected.
¾ Recording for Encrypted Channel
Limitation for record/view/play of the encrypted
programme will change. (> 34)
Automatic” andEncrypt Recording” cannot be
selected in the following cases.
“One cable” has been selected in “Easy Setting” or
“Auto Setup”. (> 22, 85)
“Single Cable” has been selected in “Antenna
System” and one user band is disabled. (> 26, 86)
On Playback High Definition video (AVCHD)
Off Playback High Definition quality title
HDD / Disc
Settings for Recording
Settings for Recording
Timer Record Start Buffer
Timer Record Stop Buffer
REWIND LIVE TV
Aspect for Recording
Chapter Creation
Rec for High Speed Copy
BD / DVD Speed for High Speed Copy
Recording time in EP mode
Recording for Encrypted Channel
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 87 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Convenient functions
VQT3C73
88
Changing the unit’s settings
¾ Aspect for Recording
Sets the aspect ratio when recording or copying except
in DR mode.
If “Automatic” is selected, the title will be recorded
with the original aspect ratio at the time when
recording started (including when recording started at
a commercial, etc.).
In the following cases, the programme will be
recorded with the original aspect ratio.
[BD-RE] [BD-R] When the recording mode is set to
“XP”, “SP”, “LP”, “EP” or “FR
[HDD] [RAM] When the recording mode is set to “XP”,
“SP”, “LP”, “EP” or “FR” with the “Rec for High
Speed Copy” set to Off”
In the following cases, aspect is fixed to 4:3.
[DVD-R] [DVD-RW] When the recording mode is set to
“EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.
When recording to a +R, +R DL and +RW.
¾ Chapter Creation
[HDD]
Set the Chapter Creation method.
Even if “Automatic” is selected, depending on the
programme to be recorded, the chapter may not be
created correctly.
¾ Rec for High Speed Copy
You can copy titles to DVD in high speed mode, if you
set to “On” before recording a programme.
This setting is valid for the following cases:
Recording from external equipment
Copying from a finalised DVD-Video disc
IfOnis selected, the following restrictions are
applied to recorded titles.
The settings in “Aspect for Recording” (> above)
and in “Bilingual Audio Selection (> 89) are applied
to titles.
You cannot switch the audio when watching a
programme via AV input.
¾ BD / DVD Speed for High Speed Copy
Select the speed of high-speed copying.
If “Normal ( Silent )” is selected, the time required for
copying will double (approximately).
¾ Recording time in EP mode
Select the maximum number of hours for recording in
EP mode (> 113, Recording modes and approximate
recording times).
When recording to DVD-RAM using “8 hours” mode, it
may not be possible to play on DVD players.
HDD Management
Press and hold [OK] for 3 seconds to show the following
settings.
¾ Delete all titles
Delete all titles (video) on the HDD.
Delete does not work if one or more titles are
protected.
¾ Delete all photos
Delete all photos on the HDD.
¾ Format HDD
Formatting deletes all contents, and they cannot be
restored. Check carefully before proceeding.
HDD / Disc
HDD Management
Delete all titles
Delete all photos
Format HDD
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 88 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Convenient functions
VQT3C73
89
Still Mode
Select the type of picture shown when you pause play
(> 116, Frames and fields).
Seamless Play
Select the play mode between playlist chapter segments
and partially deleted titles.
If you setOn” the chapters in playlists are played
seamlessly. This does not work when there are several
audio types included on the playlist and when using Quick
View (PLAYa1.3).
This function cannot be used on encrypted titles ( ).
NTSC Video Output
Select how to output the NTSC image.
Dynamic Range Compression
[BD-V] [DVD-V]
Change the dynamic range for late night viewing.
Downmix
Select the downmix system of multi-channel to 2-channels
sound.
Select “Surround encoded”, when the connected
equipment supports the virtual surround function.
There is no effect on “Bitstream” via HDMI AV OUT and
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal.
The audio will be output in “Stereo” in the following cases.
AVCHD playback
[BD-V] : Playback of clicking sound on the menu and
audio with secondary video in picture-in-picture mode
Bilingual Audio Selection
Select whether to record the audio type (“M1” or “M2”) when:
File Conversion (> 50)
Copying to a DVD-R, DVD-RW, +R and +RW.
Rec for High Speed Copy” is enabled. (> 88)
Picture
Automatic
Field Select if jittering occurs when “Automatic” is
selected. (The picture is coarser.)
Frame Select if small text or fine patterns cannot
be seen clearly when “Automatic is
selected. (The picture is clearer and finer.)
Setup
Picture
Picture
Still Mode
Seamless Play
NTSC Video Output
Sound
Setup
Sound
Sound
Dynamic Range Compression
Downmix
Bilingual Audio Selection
Digital Audio Output
Audio Delay
Audio for HG / HX / HE / HL / HM Recording
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 89 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Convenient functions
VQT3C73
90
Changing the unit’s settings
Digital Audio Output
¾ PCM Down Conversion
Select how to output audio with a sampling frequency
of 96 kHz.
It will be converted to 48 kHz regardless of the setting
in the following cases.
The signals have a sampling frequency of over
96 kHz.
The disc has copy protection.
“BD-Video Secondary Audio” is set to “On”. ([BD-V])
If “Off” is selected, signals are output as 96 kHz
If “On” is selected, signals are converted to 48 kHz.
(Choose when the connected equipment cannot
process signals with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz.)
¾ Dolby D / Dolby D + / Dolby TrueHD
¾ DTS / DTS-HD
¾ MPEG
Select the audio signal to output.
Select “PCM” when the connected equipment cannot
decode the respective audio format.
Not making the proper settings may result in noise.
¾ BD-Video Secondary Audio
([BD-V] with secondary audio)
Turn on/off the clicking sound on the menu and audio
with secondary video.
If “Off” is selected, the primary audio only is output.
Audio Delay
Mis-sync between the video and audio is corrected by
delaying the audio output.
Audio for HG / HX / HE / HL / HM
Recording
If the programme has multi channel audio, priority is given to
what you select.
This setting will give effect in the following cases.
File Conversion (> 50)
Normal speed copy in HG, HX, HE, HL or HM mode from
a title recorded in DR mode. (> 54, 57)
Language
Select the language for on-screen menus.
On-Screen Information
Select the approximate time until the channel information
screen (> 28) disappears automatically.
Unit’s Display
Changes the brightness of the unit’s display.
If “Dim” is selected the display turns dark during play and
disappears when the unit is turned off. It reappears
momentarily if a button is pressed. While using this mode,
the standby power consumption can be reduced.
Screen Saver
This is to prevent burn-in on the screen.
If “On” is selected, the masked-off area on the screen
becomes grey.
Depending on the condition of the unit (Connection, Setting)
the masked-off area on the screen becomes grey.
Teletext
Select the Teletext (> 28) display mode.
Blue LED
Set the lighting method for the lamp on the SD card slot.
IfSD inserted” is selected, when this unit is turned on and
SD card is inserted, the lamp is lighted.
HDMI (SUB) V.OFF LED Control
[BST 800]
Set to light the HDMI (SUB) V.OFF LED or not.
This will light when “HDMI (SUB) Output Mode” (> 91) is set
to “V. OFF ( Video Off )”, and the power of the connected
equipment to the HDMI AV OUT (SUB) is on.
Sound
Digital Audio Output
Digital Audio Output
Dolby D / Dolby D+ / Dolby TrueHD
DTS / DTS-HD
MPEG
BD-Video Secondary Audio
PCM Down Conversion
Display
Setup
Display
Display
Language
On-Screen Information
Unit’s Display
Screen Saver
Teletext
Blue LED
HDMI (SUB) V.OFF LED Control
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 90 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Convenient functions
VQT3C73
91
3D Settings
¾ 3D Type
If 3D video cannot be played back in 3D, change the
settings as required by the connected TV format.
Change the settings for 3D on the TV also when “Side
by side” is selected.
¾ 3D Playback Message
Set to display or hide the 3D viewing warning screen
when playing back the 3D compatible video software.
TV Aspect
Set to match the type of TV connected.
Aspect for 4:3 Video
To play a 4:3 title, set how to show pictures on a 16:9
widescreen TV.
TV System
Set in accordance with the TV System for the connected TV.
HDMI Connection
¾ HDMI (SUB) Output Mode
[BST8 00]
Set to output the video from the HDMI AV OUT (SUB)
terminal or not.
¾ HDMI Video Format
You can only select items compatible with the
connected equipment.
If “Automatic” is selected, the output resolution best
suited to the connected TV (1080p, 1080i, 720p or
576p/480p) is automatically selected.
To enjoy High Quality Video up-converted to 1080p,
you need to connect the unit directly to 1080p
compatible HDTV. If this unit is connected to an HDTV
through other equipment, it must also be 1080p
compatible.
¾ 24p Output
When playing BD-Video recorded in 24 frames, this unit
displays each frame at 1/24 second intervals–the same
interval originally shot with the film movie.
This item is effective only when this unit is connected
to a TV supporting 1080/24p output using an HDMI
cable andHDMI Video Format” is set to “Automatic”
or “1080p”.
When BD-Video images other than 24p are played,
images are output at 60p.
¾ Deep Colour Output
This setting is for selecting whether to use Deep Colour
output when a TV that supports Deep Colour is
connected.
¾ HDMI Audio Output
Select “Off” when connected to a TV with an HDMI
cable, and connected to an amplifier not compatible
with HDMI with a DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal.
Connection
Pan & Scan
Side picture is trimmed for 16:9 picture.
The pictures may be shown in the
letterbox style depending on the content.
Letterbox
Black bands appear for 16:9 picture.
Setup
Connection
Connection
TV Aspect
3D Settings
Aspect for 4:3 Video
TV System
HDMI Connection
AV2 Settings
Common Interface
AV1 Output
Connection
3D Settings
3D Settings
3D Type
3D Playback Message
Connection
HDMI Connection
HDMI Connection
HDMI (SUB) Output Mode
HDMI Video Format
24p Output
Deep Colour Output
Contents Type Flag
HDMI Audio Output
VIERA Link
7.1ch Audio Reformatting
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 91 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Convenient functions
VQT3C73
92
Changing the unit’s settings
¾ 7.1ch Audio Reformatting
[BD-V]
Surround sound with 6.1 ch or less is automatically
expanded and played back at 7.1 ch.
If “Off” is selected, sound is played over the original
number of channels. (Note that in the case of 6.1 ch
audio, playback will be at 5.1 ch)
Audio reformatting is enabled in the following cases:
When you have selected “PCM” in “Digital Audio
Output”.
When the audio is Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus,
Dolby TrueHD or LPCM.
¾ Contents Type Flag
Depending on the playback content, the TV will output
adjusting to the optimal method when a TV that
supports Contents Type Flag is connected.
¾ VIERA Link
Set to use “HDAVI Control” function when connected
with an HDMI cable to a device that supports “HDAVI
Control”.
Select “Off” when you do not want to use “HDAVI
Control”.
AV1 Output
Set according to the terminal of the connected TV.
AV2 Settings
¾ AV2 Input
Set according to the output from the external
equipment.
¾ Ext Link
Set “Ext Link 1” when a Set Top Box which transmits a
control signal via the 21-pin Scart cable is connected.
This setting cannot be made when “TV System is set
to “NTSC” (> 91).
Common Interface
Access to software contained on CI module. (> 12)
Select “Slot 1:” or “Slot 2:” and press [OK].
Follow the on-screen instructions.
On-screen instructions may not correspond to the remote control
buttons.
For more information about TV service, please contact your service
provider.
Depending on the card, in some cases its use together with this unit may
be limited or not possible.
Connection
AV2 Settings
AV2 Settings
AV2 Input
Ext Link
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 92 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Convenient functions
VQT3C73
93
Network Easy Setting
Press [OK] to start Network Easy Setting. (> 23)
Network Settings
¾ LAN Connection Mode
Select connection method.
[BST700] [BST701]Wireless” is enabled only when the
Wireless LAN adaptor DY-WL10 (optional) is
connected.
¾ Wireless Settings
This allows the Wireless router and connection settings
to be set and the current connection settings and
connection state to be checked when a wireless
connection is used.
¾ Connection Setting
The Wireless router connection wizard will be
displayed.
¾ Double Speed Mode Setting (2.4GHz)
When a 2.4 GHz wireless format is used, this setting
sets the connection speed.
If you connect using the “Double Speed
Mode(40MHz)”, 2 channels use the same
frequency band, and there is consequently a
greater risk of reception interference. This can
cause the connection speed to drop or the
connection to become unstable.
¾ IP Address / DNS Settings
Check the connection of the network or set the IP
address and DNS.
Press [OK] to show the respective setting.
“Connection Speed Setting” is enabled only when Connection
Speed Auto-configure” is turned “Off”.
¾ Proxy Server Settings
Check and set the connection to the Proxy server.
Press [OK] to show the respective setting.
¾ Internet Content Settings
¾ Lock
You can restrict using VIERA CAST.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
PIN is required to change. (> 84)
¾ Automatic Volume Control
Volume that is different depending on the contents is
adjusted automatically to the standard volume while
using the VIERA CAST.
Depending on contents, this function will not work.
Select “Off” when the audio is warped.
Network
Setup
Network
Network
Network Easy Setting
Network Settings
Network
Network Settings
Network Settings
Wireless Settings
IP Address / DNS Settings
Proxy Server Settings
Internet Content Settings
Home Network ( DLNA ) Server Settings
LAN Connection Mode
Network Settings
Wireless Settings
Wireless Settings
Double Speed Mode Setting (2.4GHz)
Connection Setting
Current connection settings
The current connection settings and status are
displayed.
Connection status
Current status
Network name
(SSID)
Wireless type
802.11n (2.4GHz/20MHz)
Authentication type
Encryption type
AES
Reception
Type of wireless router
Encryption type Reception
Network Settings
Internet Content Settings
Internet Content Settings
Automatic Volume Control
Lock
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 93 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Convenient functions
VQT3C73
94
Changing the unit’s settings
¾ Home Network ( DLNA ) Server Settings
You can set the DLNA (Server) function (> 80)
¾ Home Network ( DLNA ) Server
function
You can switch between enable/disable of the DLNA
(Server) function.
If “On” is selected, “Power Save in Standby” is
fixed to “Off”. (> right)
This cannot be set to “On” if the connection with
the wireless broadband router is not encrypted in
the wireless connection.
¾ Setting device name
It is also possible to change the name of this unit on
the network.
Select from a preset list
Select the preset name, then press [OK].
Create name
Enter the name. (> 76, Entering text)
¾ Registration type for remote devices
¾ Remote device list
This function cannot be enabled when “Manual” is
selected in “Registration type for remote devices”.
(> above)
To register equipment manually
1 Select the device name or the MAC Address for
the device you want to register, then press
[OK].
2 Select “Yes”, then press [OK].
To deregister equipment
1 Select the registered equipment, then press
[OK].
2 Select “Yes”, then press [OK].
The maximum number of equipment that can be registered is
16.
Standby Settings
¾ Power Save in Standby
This function cannot be enabled when the DLNA
function is enabled in “Home Network ( DLNA )
Server Settings”. (> left)
The setting may be changed to “Off” automatically
when the setting for video communication is changed.
(> 77)
¾ Automatic Standby
Set the time to turn the unit to standby mode
automatically.
After the unit has finished operating, the unit will be
turned to standby mode once the set time has passed.
When “REWIND LIVE TV” is set to “On” (> 87), “Off
cannot be selected.
Automatic All connected devices on the same
network can access this unit.
Manual Only registered devices can
access this unit.
Network Settings
Home Network ( DLNA ) Server Settings
Home Network ( DLNA ) Server Settings
Home Network ( DLNA ) Server function
Setting device name
Registration type for remote devices
Remote device list
Others
On It will go into the “Power Save in
Standby” mode.
On Timer “Power Save in Standby” is activated
when the set time comes.
If the clock has not been set, “Power
Save in Standby” is activated at all
hours.
Off It is possible to start quickly from the
standby mode. (Quick Start mode)
Setup
Others
Others
Standby Settings Enlgish
Remote Control
Clock
PIN Entry
System Update
System Information
DivX Registration
Initialize
Others
Standby Settings Enlgish
Standby Settings
Power Save in Standby Enlgish
Automatic Standby
Automatic Standby after OTR
Automatic Standby after Copy
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 94 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Convenient functions
VQT3C73
95
¾ Automatic Standby after OTR
If “On” is selected, this unit is turned to standby mode
when it is not operated for approximately 5 minutes
after completing “Automatic Stop” or “Recording Time”
(> 31).
¾ Automatic Standby after Copy
If “On” is selected, this unit is turned to standby mode
when it is not operated for approximately 5 minutes
after completing copy (> 54, Copying to HDD with
DIRECT NAVIGATOR, Copying titles with copying list).
Remote Control
Change the remote control code on the main unit and the
remote control if you place other Panasonic products close
together.
Use “BD 1”, the factory set code, under normal
circumstances.
1 Select the code, then press [OK].
2 While pressing [OK], press and hold the number button
([1] to [6]) for more than 5 seconds.
3 Press and hold [OK] for more than 5 seconds.
4 Press [OK].
Operation is possible only with Panasonic remote controls
with “IR6” printed at the bottom when the remote control
code of this unit is set to “BD 4”, “BD 5” or “BD 6”.
Clock
If the time is not set correctly, use the settings listed in the
method below.
Automatic
This unit usually obtains time and date information from
digital broadcasts.
But, if the time is not set correctly, set it to “Off” and
perform “Manual setting”.
Time Zone
When the time is not correct, set Time Zone”.
(GMT -6 to + 6)
Manual setting
1 Select “Off” of “Automatic”, then press [OK].
2 Select the item you want to change.
3 Change the setting.
4 Press [OK] when you have finished the settings.
When the clock is set manually, you cannot perform
playing/recording/PAUSE LIVE TV/REWIND LIVE TV of the
programmes that are copy protected (Copying is prohibited). (> 13)
PIN Entry
You can set/change the PIN. (> 84)
BLU-RAY DISC RECORDER
IR6
BLU-RAY DISC RECORDER
IR6
IR6
Clock
Time Date
Time Zone
Automatic
Please set the clock.
OK: access RETURN: leave
OK
RETURN
0
00
10
Automatic
On
11
2010
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 95 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Convenient functions
VQT3C73
96
Changing the unit’s settings
System Update
¾ Software Update in Standby
When you set this unit to standby mode, software
(firmware) updates (> 97) are downloaded
automatically at the time you have specified.
¾ Software Update Now ( Broadcast )
Software of this unit will be updated from broadcasts if
update information is detected. (> 97)
¾ Software Update Now ( Internet )
Software of this unit will be updated from Internet if
update information is detected. (> 97)
¾ Software Licence
Information about the software licence is displayed.
System Information
Display software (firmware), HDAVI Control version and
Wireless Module version (When using wireless connection
only) of this unit.
DivX Registration
You need this registration code to purchase and play DivX
Video-on-Demand (VOD) content (> 107).
Initialize
¾ Shipping Condition
All the settings except for basic settings return to the
factory preset. The timer recording programmes are
also cancelled.
¾ Default Settings
All the settings other than the tuning settings, clock
settings, disc language settings, rating PIN, remote
control code, network settings etc. return to the factory
presets.
Enter the code with the number buttons.
Others
System Update
System Update
Software Update in Standby Enlgish
Software Update Now ( Broadcast )
Software Update Now ( Internet )
Software Licence
Others
Initialize
Initialize
Shipping Condition
Default Settings
Language code list
Abkhazian: 6566
Afar: 6565
Afrikaans: 6570
Albanian: 8381
Amharic: 6577
Arabic: 6582
Armenian: 7289
Assamese: 6583
Aymara: 6589
Azerbaijani: 6590
Bashkir: 6665
Basque: 6985
Bengali; Bangla:
6678
Bhutani: 6890
Bihari: 6672
Breton: 6682
Bulgarian: 6671
Burmese: 7789
Byelorussian: 6669
Cambodian: 7577
Catalan: 6765
Chinese: 9072
Corsican: 6779
Croatian: 7282
Czech: 6783
Danish: 6865
Dutch: 7876
English: 6978
Esperanto: 6979
Estonian: 6984
Faroese: 7079
Fiji: 7074
Finnish: 7073
French: 7082
Frisian: 7089
Galician: 7176
Georgian: 7565
German: 6869
Greek: 6976
Greenlandic: 7576
Guarani: 7178
Gujarati: 7185
Hausa: 7265
Hebrew: 7387
Hindi: 7273
Hungarian: 7285
Icelandic: 7383
Indonesian: 7378
Interlingua: 7365
Irish: 7165
Italian: 7384
Japanese: 7465
Javanese: 7487
Kannada: 7578
Kashmiri: 7583
Kazakh: 7575
Kirghiz: 7589
Korean: 7579
Kurdish: 7585
Laotian: 7679
Latin: 7665
Latvian, Lettish: 7686
Lingala: 7678
Lithuanian: 7684
Macedonian: 7775
Malagasy: 7771
Malay: 7783
Malayalam: 7776
Maltese: 7784
Maori: 7773
Marathi: 7782
Moldavian: 7779
Mongolian: 7778
Nauru: 7865
Nepali: 7869
Norwegian: 7879
Oriya: 7982
Pashto, Pushto: 8083
Persian: 7065
Polish: 8076
Portuguese: 8084
Punjabi: 8065
Quechua: 8185
8277
Rhaeto-Romance:
Romanian: 8279
Russian: 8285
Samoan: 8377
Sanskrit: 8365
Scots Gaelic: 7168
Serbian: 8382
Serbo-Croatian: 8372
Shona: 8378
Sindhi: 8368
Singhalese: 8373
Slovak: 8375
Slovenian: 8376
Somali: 8379
Spanish: 6983
Sundanese: 8385
Swahili: 8387
Swedish: 8386
Tagalog: 8476
Tajik: 8471
Tamil: 8465
Tatar: 8484
Telugu: 8469
Thai: 8472
Tibetan: 6679
Tigrinya: 8473
Tonga: 8479
Turkish: 8482
Turkmen: 8475
Twi: 8487
Ukrainian: 8575
Urdu: 8582
Uzbek: 8590
Vietnamese: 8673
Volapük: 8679
Welsh: 6789
Wolof: 8779
Xhosa: 8872
Yiddish: 7473
Yo r u b a : 8 9 7 9
Zulu: 9085
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 96 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Convenient functions
VQT3C73
97
Software (Firmware) Update
Software of this unit can be updated automatically by the
following methods at the specified time.
(Default setting is 3 a.m. > 96, Software Update in Standby)
From broadcasts
From Internet
§
To update the Software (Firmware) immediately, use
the following function:
Software Update Now ( Broadcast ) (> 96)
Software of this unit will be updated from broadcasts if
update information is detected.
Software Update Now ( Internet )
§
(> 96)
Software of this unit will be updated from Internet if
update information is detected.
§
Network connection and setting are required. (> 16,
23)
The unit’s display during the update
e.g.,
When “FINISH” is displayed, update of the software
(firmware) has completed.
It may take up to a few hours until the update is completed depending on
the network or broadcast environment.
If the timer recording is scheduled within the following time at the start of
the download, the download will not be executed.
– From broadcast: Within 4 hours
– From Internet: Within 1 hour
You can also download the latest software (firmware) from the following
website and burn it to a CD-R to update the software (firmware).
http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/
If you do not want to perform the software (firmware) update, set the
“Software Update in Standby” to “Off”. (> 96)
Software (firmware) of CAM (compatible CI Plus) can be
updated automatically from broadcasts.
Availability of software (firmware) update is detected while
viewing the programmes compatible with CI Plus.
1 When notification is displayed on the
screen, select “Yes” and press [OK].
If for some reason the notification is not displayed,
or if cancelled, the notification is instead displayed
on the Channel information (> 28).
e.g.,
To execute CAM software upgrade, press the “Red
button.
2 Follow the instructions on the screen.
The unit’s display during the update
Do not remove the CAM from this unit while updating.
CAM software (firmware) update notice is not displayed in the following
cases:
When recording a programme
– When timer recording and CAM update occur simultaneously
When displaying FUNCTION MENU, DIRECT NAVIGATOR, etc.
Operations such as view, playback, or record cannot be performed while
upgrading the CAM.
Any buttons on the remote control or the unit cannot be used while
upgrading the CAM.
If the timer recording is started, CAM software upgrade is cancelled to
start recording.
For details, refer to your CAM’s operating instructions or consult your
dealer.
You cannot operate the unit until the update is
complete. Removing the AC mains lead while the
update is in progress may damage the unit. Don’t
remove the AC mains lead during the update.
Update software (firmware) of
this unit
CI Plus compatible CAM
software (firmware) update
1
All DVB Channels
10:30
NEWS
9:00 - 11:00
Now
Dolby DEncrypted
Change category
CAM Upgrade Info
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 97 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Convenient functions
VQT3C73
98
Other Settings
When black bars are shown at the top, bottom, left, and right
sides of the screen, you can enlarge the image to fill the
screen.
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Select “Aspect”, then press [OK].
3 Select the item, then press [OK].
This function does not work when watching 3D programme and playing
back 3D title or 3D photo.
It may also be adjusted using the screen mode of the TV etc.
The screen mode is switched to “Normal” in the following situations:
– when you change the channel
– when you start or end the playback of a title
– when the unit is turned off or on.
[BD-V] [DVD-V] “Side cut” does not have any effect.
When “TV Aspect” (> 91) is set to “Pan & Scan” or “Letterbox”, the
“Zoom” effect is disabled.
The TV can be operated from the TV operation area of the
remote control.
Perform the setting if you cannot operate the TV with the
buttons in the TV operation area.
1 While pressing [TV Í], enter the code
(> right) with the number buttons.
2 Point the remote control at the TV
Test by turning on the TV and changing
channels.
Repeat the procedure until you find the code that
allows correct operation.
If the brand of your TV is not listed or the code
number is invalid for the TV, this remote control is
not compatible with your TV.
If your TV brand has more than one code listed, select the one that
allows correct operation.
Manufacturer and Code No.
Switching the aspect ratio of the
screen
Normal Normal output
Side cut The black bars on the right and left
sides of the 16:9 image disappear and
the image is enlarged.
Zoom The black bars on the top and bottom
sides of the 4:3 image disappear and
the image is enlarged.
TV operation setting
PAGE
CH
AV
TV
DRIVE
SELECT
VOL
213
INPUT
TV operation area
Brand Code Brand Code
AIWA 35
BENQ 58/59
BRANDT 10/15
CENTREX 66
CURTIS 05
DESMET 05
ELEMIS 05
FINLUX 61
Panasonic 01/02/03/04
AKAI 27/30
BEKO 05/71/72/73/74
BUSH 05
DAEWOO 64/65
DUAL 05
FERGUSON 10/34
FISHER 21
MITSUBISHI 05/19/20/47
METZ 05/28/79
MIVAR 24
NEC 36
NOKIA 25/26/27/60/61
OLEVIA 45
ORION 05
PHILCO 41/48/64
PHONOLA 05
PROVIEW 52
RADIOLA 05
NOBLEX 33
NORDMENDE 10
ONWA 30/39/70
PEONY 49/69
PHILIPS 05/06/46
PIONEER 37/38
PYE 05
SABA 10
FUJITSU 53
ITT
LG
GOLDSTAR 05/50/51
GRADIENTE 36
25
JVC 17/30/39/70
KOLIN 45
05/50/51
MAG 52
LOEWE 07/46
FUNAI 63/67
GOODMANS 05
GRUNDIG 09
IRRADIO 30
KDS 52
KONKA 62
HITACHI 05/22/23/40/41
SALORA 26
SANSUI 05
32/42/43/65/68SAMSUNG
SCHNEIDER 05/29/30
SELECO 05/25
SIEMENS 09
SONY 08
TELEFUNKEN 10/11/12/13/14
TOSHIBA 16/57
YAMAHA 18/41
05
WHITE
WESTINGHOUSE
SANYO 21/54/55/56
05/69/75/76/77/78
SEG
SINUDYNE 05
31/33/66/67/69TCL
TEVION 52
THOMSON 10/15/44
SHARP 18
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 98 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Troubleshooting
VQT3C73
99
Messages on the unit’s display
Troubleshooting
The following messages or service numbers appear on the
unit’s display when something unusual is detected during
startup and use.
BD
(“” stands for a
number.)
The remote control and main unit are
using different codes. Change the code
on the remote control. (> 95)
CAM-UP
CAM is being updated. (> 97)
GUIDE
TV Guide data is being downloaded.
(> 29)
FINISH
The software (firmware) update is
complete. (> 97)
HARD ERR
If there is no change after turning the unit
on and off, consult the dealer where the
unit was purchased.
NoERAS
You cannot delete items on this disc.
The disc may be damaged. Use a new
disc.
NoREAD
The disc is dirty or badly scratched. The
unit cannot record, play, or edit. (> 9)
This message may appear when the
lens cleaner has finished cleaning.
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main
unit to eject the disc. (> 20)
NoWRIT
You cannot write to this disc.
The disc may be damaged. Use a new
disc.
PLEASE
WAIT
Displayed when the unit is started and
turned off.
There was a power failure or the AC
plug was disconnected while the unit
was on. The unit is carrying out its
recovery process. This process
restores the unit to normal operation.
The unit is not broken. Wait until the
message disappears.
PROG FULL
There are already 64 timer programmes.
Delete unnecessary timer programmes.
(> 38)
REMOVE
The USB device is drawing too much
power. Remove the USB device.
START
Update of the software (firmware) is
started.
You cannot operate the unit until the
update is complete. (> 97)
SW-DL
Software (firmware) is downloading.
Download will stop when the unit is
turned on, or the timer recording starts.
(> 97)
UNSUPPORT
You have inserted a disc the unit cannot
play or record on. (> 6)
You tried to operate with a non-
compatible USB memory.
UPD /
(“” stands for a
number.)
The software (firmware) is being
updated.
You cannot operate the unit until the
update is complete. (> 97)
U59
The unit is hot.
The unit switches to standby for safety
reasons. Wait for about 30 minutes until
the message disappears.
Select a position with good ventilation
when installing the unit. Do not block the
cooling fan on the rear of the unit.
U61
(When a disc is not inserted) Displays
when a malfunction has occurred. This is
displayed when the unit is in the recovery
process to return to normal operation.
Once the display clears you can use the
unit again.
If it remains displayed, consult the dealer
where the unit was purchased.
U76
HDMI cannot be output because it is
connected to a model that does not
support copyright protection.
U77
Due to the current disc not having
authorised copyright information, video
output is not performed.
U88
(When a disc is inserted) Displays when
there was something unusual detected
with the disc while recording, playback or
copy. This is displayed when the unit is in
the recovery process to return to normal
operation. Once the display clears you
can use the unit again.
If it remains displayed, consult the dealer
where the unit was purchased.
U99
The unit fails to operate properly. Press
[Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to
standby mode. Now press [Í/I] on the
main unit again to turn the unit on.
H or F
(“” stands for a
number.)
There is something unusual. (The
service number displayed after H and F
depends on the unit’s condition.)
Check the unit using the
troubleshooting guide. (> 100) If the
service number does not disappear, do
the following.
1. Disconnect the plug from the
household mains socket, wait a few
seconds, then reconnect it.
2. Press [Í/I] to turn the power on. (The
unit may be fixed.)
If the service number does not disappear
despite after doing the above, request
service from the dealer. Inform the dealer
of the service number when requesting
service.
XHOLD
The HOLD function is activated.
Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN ] at
the same time until “X HOLD”
disappears. (> 20)
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 99 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Troubleshooting
VQT3C73
100
Troubleshooting guide
Before requesting service, make the following checks. If
the problem still persists, consult your dealer for
instructions.
Updating to the latest software (firmware) may solve the
problem. (> 97)
The unit doesn’t work.
One of the unit’s safety devices may have been
activated.
Reset the unit as follows:
1 Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to
standby.
If the unit doesn’t switch to standby, press [Í/I] on
the main unit for about 3 seconds. The unit is
forcibly switched to standby.
Alternatively, disconnect the AC mains lead, wait
one minute, then reconnect it.
2 Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch it on. If the unit
still cannot be operated, consult the dealer.
Cannot eject a disc.
The unit may have a problem.
1 While the unit is off, press and hold [OK], the yellow
button and the blue button on the remote control at
the same time for more than 5 seconds.
00 RET” is displayed on the units display.
2 Repeatedly press [1] (right) on the remote control or
[Í/I] on the main unit until “06 FTO” is displayed on
the unit’s display.
3 Press [OK] on the remote control or
[< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit.
The unit is turned off automatically.
¾ If you connected this unit to a “HDAVI Control
compatible TV with an HDMI cable, or connected this unit
to a Q Link-compatible TV with a fully wired 21-pin Scart
cable, this unit will be automatically set to standby mode
when the TV is set to standby mode.
The unit does not turn on when pressing
[Í].
¾ Linked timer recordings with external equipment is in
recording standby (“EXT-L on the unit’s display blinks
when [Í] is pressed). Press [EXT LINK] to cancel the
recording standby.
The display is dim.
¾ Change “Unit’s Display”. (> 90)
“0:00 is flashing on the unit’s display.
¾ Set the clock. (> 95)
The time recorded on the disc and the
available time shown do not add up.
¾ [DVD-R] [+R] If you record or edit about 200 times or more,
the remaining capacity of the disc is reduced and then
recording or editing may be disabled (for the second
layer on DVD-R DL and +R DL, this happens after about
60 times).
¾ Available disc space display may be different from actual.
Varying may be large especially when recorded in DR
mode.
The clock does not display on the unit when
switched to standby.
¾ The clock does not display when “Power Save in
Standby” is activated. Ensure “Power Save in Standby is
set to “Off”. (> 94)
The followings do not indicate a problem with this
unit:
Regular disc rotating sounds or louder rotating sounds
when recording or high speed copying.
Poor reception due to atmospheric conditions.
Image disturbance during search.
Image disturbance when replacing 3D discs.
Interruptions in reception due to periodic broadcasting
breaks.
When the unit is turned on or off, there may be an
unexpected sound. This does not indicate a problem
with this unit.
Power
Displays
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 100 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Troubleshooting
VQT3C73
101
Screen size is wrong.
¾ Check the “TV Aspect” or “Aspect for 4:3 Video”. (> 91)
¾ Adjust the aspect ratio setting on TV. Refer to your TV’s
operating instructions.
¾ If the 16:9 aspect ratio image is output to a 4:3 TV and
the image will be stretched vertically, set “TV Aspect” to
4:3. (> 91)
¾ Check “Aspect for Recording” before recording or file
conversion. (> 88)
¾ If you connect to 4:3 TV, set “HDMI Video Format” to
“576p/480p”. (> 91)
Pictures do not appear with the HD quality
although HD setting was made.
¾ The pictures are output with 576p/480p depending on the
programme.
The screen changes automatically.
¾ If there is no operation for 5 minutes or more, the
displayed screen switches to the other states
automatically (only when the “Screen Saver” is set to
“On”). (> 90)
There is a lot of image lag when playing
video.
¾ Set “HD optimizer” in the Picture menu to “Off”. (> 83)
¾ Set “Audio Delay”. (> 90)
The images from this unit do not appear on
the TV.
The picture is distorted during play, or video
will not play correctly.
¾ Check the connection and the TV’s input settings.
¾ An incorrect resolution is selected in “HDMI Video
Format”. Reset the setting as follows:
1 While the unit is on, press and hold [OK], the yellow
button and the blue button on the remote control at
the same time for more than 5 seconds.
“00 RET” is displayed on the unit’s display.
2 Repeatedly press [1] (right) on the remote control or
[Í/I] on the main unit until “04 PRG” is displayed on
the unit’s display.
3 Press and hold [OK] on the remote control or
[< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit for at least
3 seconds.
Set the item again. (> 91)
When Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, and DTS-
HD audio are not output in bitstream, select “Yes” in
“Default Settings” and make proper settings. (> 96)
¾ The unit’s “TV System” setting differs from the TV system
used by the disc now playing. While stopped, keep
pressing [] (STOP) and [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main
unit for 5 or more seconds. The system switches from
PAL to NTSC or vice versa. (> 91)
¾ Picture may not be seen when more than 4 devices are
connected with HDMI cables.
Reduce the number of connected devices.
¾ The picture may be distorted or a black screen may
appear between scenes recorded with different aspect
ratios.
¾ DVD-R DL and +R DL discs have two writable layers on
one side. Video and audio may momentarily cut out when
the unit is switching layers.
¾ Set “Deep Colour Output” (> 91) or “Contents Type Flag
(> 92) to “Off”.
3D video is not output correctly.
¾ Check the settings on this unit and the TV. (> 46)
¾ When a non-3D compatible amplifier/receiver is
connected between this unit and a TV, 3D video is not
output. (> 18)
¾ When the amplifier/receiver which is connected between
this unit and a TV is off, 3D video is not output. (> 18)
¾ Discs that have recorded titles with Side by side
(2 screen structure) and that can be enjoyed in 3D are
played back in accordance with the settings of the TV.
¾ When “HDMI Audio Output” is set to “Off”, 3D video may
not be output correctly. (> 91)
No sound.
Distorted sound.
¾ Check the connections or amplifier’s settings. (> 14, 18)
¾ Press [AUDIO] to select the audio. (> 28, 45)
¾ To output audio from a device connected with an HDMI
cable, set “HDMI Audio Output” to “On”. (> 91)
Cannot switch audio.
¾ You cannot switch the audio if “Digital Audio Output” is
set to “Bitstream” (> 90)
TV screen and video
Sound
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 101 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Troubleshooting
VQT3C73
102
Troubleshooting guide
The remote control doesn’t work.
¾ The remote control and main unit are using different
codes. Change the code on the remote control.
¾ Software (firmware) is updating when “UPD /” is
displaying on the unit’s display. Wait until the update is
completed. (> 97)
¾ The HOLD function is activated. (> 20)
The unit is on but cannot be operated.
¾ Drive has not been selected properly.
Cannot tune channels.
¾ Check the connections.
Startup is slow.
¾ Startup takes time in the following situations:
A disc is inserted.
The clock is not set.
Immediately after a power failure or the AC mains lead
is connected.
When the unit is connected with an HDMI cable.
When the BD-J (> 116) application is executing.
When the “Power Save in Standby” is activated. (> 94)
Cannot record.
Cannot copy.
¾ Some broadcasts are copyright protected.
¾ You cannot record to the disc by pressing the [REC ¥] or
timer recording.
¾ The disc is protected withDVD Management” or “Blu-
ray Disc Management”. (> 74)
¾ Some programmes on digital broadcast channels are
copy-restricted and the number of times you can copy in
DR, HG, HX, HE, HL, HM mode is assigned by the
broadcaster.
¾ [DVD-R] [DVD-RW] [+R] [+RW] Since it will copy to HDD
temporarily, copying is not possible if there is insufficient
available capacity on the HDD.
Delete unnecessary titles on the HDD. (> 47)
¾ You cannot copy on finalised discs.
¾ [DVD-R] [DVD-RW] [+R] [+RW] Copying or editing may not be
possible on these discs after ejecting and loading the
disc or turning the unit on/off for approximately 30 times
after being copied to.
¾ Discs recorded on equipment other than this unit may not
be able to be recorded to.
¾ This unit cannot record/copy NTSC signals to discs that
already have PAL signal recordings.
Play of discs recorded with both PAL and NTSC on
another unit is not guaranteed.
Cannot record from external equipment.
¾ Check that the connection and input channel is correct.
(> 15)
Timer recording does not work properly.
¾ Refer to “Notes on timer recording”. (> 37)
A part or whole of a recorded title has been
lost.
¾ If there is a power failure or the AC mains lead is
disconnected from the household mains socket while
recording or editing, the title may be lost or the HDD/disc
may become unusable.
We cannot offer any guarantee regarding lost
programmes or discs.
Operation
Press and hold [OK] and the
indicated number button at the
same time for more than
5 seconds. (> 95)
Unit's display
Recording, timer recording and
copying
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 102 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Troubleshooting
VQT3C73
103
An unusually loud sound is coming from the
rotating disc.
¾ If you want copy to perform more quietly, select “Normal
( Silent )” in “BD / DVD Speed for High Speed Copy”.
(> 88)
Encrypted titles cannot be decrypted.
¾ Depending on the encrypted service, it may not be
possible to decrypt certain content.
Cannot playback.
¾ The disc is dirty, scratched or marked. (> 9)
¾ You tried to play a +RW that needs to have a Top Menu
on the equipment used for recording.
¾ You cannot playback while executing the “Flexible
Recording via AV input”.
¾ [BD-R] [BD-RE]
Set “Play Video ( AVCHD ) on BD-RE / BD-R” to “On”
and the playback may be possible (> 87).
¾ The disc that is recorded by using other equipment and
not finalised may not be able to playback.
¾ When the icon is turned grey on the
DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen, the playable period has
ended and the title is copy protected (Copying is
prohibited). (> 13, 41)
¾ Depending on the encrypted service, it may not be
possible to play back certain titles if they have been
recorded without being decrypted.
Audio and video momentarily pause.
¾ (DVD-R DL and +R DL only) When playing a title
recorded on both layers, the unit automatically switches
between layers and plays the title in the same way as a
normal programme. However, video and audio may
momentarily cut out when the unit is switching layers.
BD-Video or DVD-Video is not played.
¾ You have set a rating level. (> 87, BD-Video Parental
Control, DVD-Video Parental Control)
¾ Ensure the disc is for the correct BD-Video region code
or DVD-Video region number, and is not defective.
¾ [BD-V] You cannot playback while recording from external
equipment.
You have forgotten your rating PIN.
You want to cancel the rating level.
¾ Refer to “To reset the rating level settings”. (> 105)
Image for the Quick View is not smooth.
¾ Image may not be played back smoothly in case of DR,
HG, HX, HE, HL, HM mode titles, AVCHD format titles or
BD-Video.
¾ This function does not work when recording is in XP or
FR mode.
The resume play function does not work.
¾ Memorized positions are cancelled when
open the disc tray.
[CD] [SD] [USB] turn off the unit.
([HDD] will not be cancelled)
¾ This function does not work for some BD-Video disc that
contains BD-J.
Cannot play the disc on other players.
¾ [BD-RE] [BD-R] Titles may not playback on other Blu-ray
Disc player.
¾ [DVD-R] [DVD-RW] [+R] [+RW] The disc must be finalised or
have a Top Menu created after recording or copying
(> 75).
¾ [DVD-R] The disc created in AVCHD format can only be
played back on AVCHD compatible equipment.
The available recording time doesn’t
increase even after deleting titles on the
disc.
¾ [BD-R] [DVD-R] [+R] Available space on the disc does not
increase even after deleting titles.
¾ [DVD-RW] [+RW] Available space on the disc increases
when you delete the last title.
Cannot edit.
¾ You may not be able to edit on the HDD if there is no
available space.
Delete any unwanted titles to create empty space. (> 47)
Cannot create a playlist.
¾ Creation or editing of playlists cannot be done on this
unit.
Play
Edit
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 103 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Troubleshooting
VQT3C73
104
Troubleshooting guide
The contents of the SD card cannot be read.
¾ Remove the card from the slot and then insert again. If
this does not solve the problem, turn off and turn on the
unit again.
Copying, deleting and setting protection
takes a long time.
¾ When there are a lot of folders and files, it may
sometimes take a few hours.
Photos do not playback normally.
¾ The images that were edited on the PC, such as
PROGRESSIVE JPEG, etc., may not play back. (> 111)
Tracks could not be copied to the HDD.
¾ If there are copyright protected tracks such as SCMS
restrictions, they will not be copied.
¾ Recording from CDs that do not conform to CD-DA
specifications (copy control CDs, etc.) cannot be
guaranteed.
This unit does not recognize the USB
connection correctly.
¾ If USB device is connected to this unit while using a
video communication the connection will not be
recognized. Press [EXIT] and reconnect USB device.
¾ If inserted during playback the USB device may not be
recognized by this unit.
Disconnect and reconnect the USB device. If it still does
not recognize the connection, turn this unit off and on
again.
¾ USB devices connected using a USB extension cable
other than the supplied with the Wireless LAN Adaptor
DY-WL10 (optional) or a USB hub may not be recognized
by this unit.
The TV Guide System does not receive any
data.
¾ If signal quality is bad (ghost images or limited
reception), the TV Guide system may not be able to
receive any data.
The empty field is displayed for some or all
channels.
¾ Some channels are not supported by the TV Guide
system.
The TV Guide information is not displayed
properly.
¾ Set the clock correctly. (> 95)
¾ There was a programme change, or TV Guide
information from a broadcast station was possibly not
correctly transmitted.
Check the current programme, e.g. on the Web site for
the TV Guide system provider or station provider.
The TV Guide data transfer was interrupted.
¾ The TV Guide system shows the data that was received
up to the interruption.
¾ The programme information may be incomplete.
The TV Guide data is not updated.
¾ You cannot download TV Guide data during recording in
the following cases.
One cable” has been selected in “Easy Setting” or
Auto Setup”. (> 22, 85)
Single Cable” has been selected in “Antenna System”
and one user band is disabled. (> 26, 86)
Photo
Music
USB
TV Guide
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 104 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Troubleshooting
VQT3C73
105
Digital broadcasts cannot be received.
¾ The dish may not be pointing in the direction of the
satellite. If problem persists consult your local TV aerial
installer.
¾ To receive an encrypted broadcast, a CI module valid for
the broadcast is required.
¾ When you use only one terminal, you may not view
correctly if you connect the satellite cable to the LNB IN 2
terminal.
¾ When you use single cable router, additional settings are
required. (> 26)
Picture regularly breaks up on some
channels.
¾ Adjust the aerial reception with “Manual Tuning”. (> 85)
Picture very infrequently breaks up on some
or all channels.
¾ Electrical atmospheric interference caused by local or
distant lightning storms or heavy rain with wind in “leafy”
locations may cause pictures to break up and audio to
mute or distort momentarily.
¾ The receiver (LNB) of the satellite dish must be suitable
for digital reception.
VIERA Link doesn’t work.
¾ Some functions may not work depending on the version
of “HDAVI Control” of the connected equipment. This unit
supports “HDAVI Control 5” functions.
¾ If the connection for the equipment connected with HDMI
was changed, or if there was a power failure or the plug
was removed from the household mains socket, “HDAVI
Control” may not work.
In this case, change TV (VIERA) setting for HDAVI
Control” again.
You cannot access this unit from DLNA
compatible equipment on the network.
¾ Check the network connection and the network settings.
(> 16, 23, 80, 81, 93)
¾ It may not be possible to connect depending on the types
of the equipment or the status of the equipment.
When using Wireless LAN connection, video
from the DLNA Certified media server is not
played back or video frames are dropped
during playback.
¾ Use 802.11n (2.4 GHz or 5 GHz) Wireless router.
Set the encryption type to “AES” (> 93, Wireless
Settings).
Simultaneous use with a microwave, cordless telephone
etc. at 2.4 GHz may result in connection interruptions or
other problems.
¾ On the “Wireless Settings” screen (> 93), the continuous
lighting of at least 4 “Reception” indicators is the target
for a stable connection. If 3 or fewer indicators are lit or
the connection is being interrupted, change the position
or angle of your Wireless router and see if the connection
state improves. If there is no improvement, connect to a
wired network and perform the “Network Easy Setting”
(> 23) again.
To return all the settings to the factory preset
¾ Perform “Shipping Condition” or “Default Settings.
(> 96)
To reset the rating level settings
¾ The rating level returns to the factory preset.
1 While the unit is on, press and hold [OK], the yellow
button and the blue button on the remote control at
the same time for more than 5 seconds.
“00 RET” is displayed on the unit’s display.
2 Repeatedly press [1] (right) on the remote control or
[Í/I] on the main unit until “03 VL” is displayed on the
units display.
3 Press [OK] on the remote control or
[< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit.
“INIT” is displayed on the unit’s display.
Broadcast
VIERA Link
Network
To reset this unit
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 105 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Reference
VQT3C73
106
Unit care
Reference
This unit
Wipe with a soft, dry cloth.
Never use alcohol, paint thinner or benzine to clean this
unit.
Before using chemically treated cloth, carefully read the
instructions that came with the cloth.
This unit’s lens
Use the Lens cleaner (not supplied) to clean the unit’s lens.
Place the unit on a surface that is flat and not subject
to vibration or impact.
Do not place on anything that
generates heat like a VCR, etc.
Place in an area where
condensation does not occur.
Conditions where condensation
may occur
When there is an extreme
change in temperature (moving
from a very hot location to a very cold location, or vice
versa, or when subjected to an air conditioner or when
cooled air directly impacts the unit).
When there is high humidity or a lot of steam in the room.
During the rainy season.
In the above situation, without turning the unit on, let the
unit adjust to the room temperature and wait 2–3 hours
until condensation is gone.
Cigarette smoke etc. causes malfunction
or breakdown
The unit may breakdown if cigarette smoke or bug
spray/vapour, etc. gets inside the unit.
Before moving the unit, ensure the disc tray is empty.
1 Turn the unit off. (Wait until “BYE” disappears from the
display.)
2 Remove the AC mains lead from the household mains
socket.
3 Move only after the unit has come to a complete stop
(approx. 3 minutes) in order to avoid subjecting to
vibration and shock. (Even after turning the unit off, the
HDD continues operating for a short time.)
The HDD is a high precision recording instrument and
because of its long recording capability and high speed
operation it is a very special device that is easily susceptible
to damage.
As a basic rule, save important content to a disc as backup.
The HDD is a device that is not built to
withstand vibration/shock or dust
Depending on the setup environment and handling of the
HDD some content may become damaged and play and
recording may no longer be possible. Especially during
operation, do not subject the unit to any vibration, shock, or
remove the AC mains lead from the household mains
socket. In the event of a power failure during recording or
play, the content may be damaged.
The HDD is a temporary storage device
The HDD is not an everlasting storage device for recorded
content. Use the HDD as a temporary storage place for one-
off viewing, editing, or copying. It is recommended to save
the recorded content on a disc or to keep the original data or
CDs that they were copied from.
Immediately save (backup) all content as
soon as you feel there may be a problem
with the HDD
If there is an irregularity within the HDD, repetitive strange
sounds or problems with picture (block noise, etc.) may
result. Using the HDD in this condition may worsen the
problem and in the worst case the HDD may no longer be
usable. As soon as you notice this type of problem, copy all
content to disc and request service. Recorded content (data)
on a HDD that has become unusable is unrecoverable.
Indemnity concerning recorded content
Panasonic does not accept any responsibility for damages
directly or indirectly due to any type of problems that result
in loss of recording or edited content (data), and does not
guarantee any content if recording or editing does not work
properly. Likewise, the above also applies in a case where
any type of repair is made to the unit (including any other
non-HDD related component).
Cleaning
Lens cleaner: RP-CL720AE
This lens cleaner may not be available for sale in all
countries, e.g. not available in Germany, please consult
your Panasonic dealer for advice.
Setup precautions
This unit
VCR
DO NOT
When moving the unit
HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 106 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Reference
VQT3C73
107
Regarding DivX and MKV
[BD-R] [DVD-R] [CD] [USB]
Video images of the copyright-protected DivX VOD
contents stored on USB device can be output only through
the HDMI output terminal.
Display the unit’s registration code.
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Select “Setup” in “Others”, then press [OK].
3 Select “DivX Registration” in “Others”, then press [OK].
After playing DivX VOD content for the first time, the
registration code is not displayed.
If you purchase DivX VOD content using a registration
code different from this unit’s code, you will not be able to
play this content.
To cancel the unit’s registration
Select “Yes” in “DivX Registration”.
Use the deregistration code to cancel the registration in
www.divx.com.
Regarding DivX VOD content that can only be played a
set number of times
Some DivX VOD contents can only be played a set number
of times. When you play this content, the number of times
already played and initially playable number of times is
displayed.
The remaining number of plays decreases each time a
programme is played. However, when playing from the
point where play was previously stopped, the remaining
number of plays does not decrease due to the resume play
function.
You can display subtitle text on the DivX and MKV video disc
on this unit.
This function has no relation to the subtitles specified in
DivX and MKV standard specifications and has no clear
standard. The operation might be different or it may not
operate properly depending on the way the file was made or
the state of this unit (playing, stopped, etc.).
Display with “Subtitles” in the Disc menu
(> 82).
DivX and MKV video files that do not display “Text” do not contain
subtitle text.
If the subtitle text is not displayed correctly, try changing the language
settings. (> 87, Subtitle Text)
You may not display subtitle text depending on a file.
Subtitles text file of DivX and MKV
Subtitles text that satisfy the following conditions can be
displayed on this unit.
File format: MicroDVD, SubRip, or TMPlayer
File extension (DivX):
“.SRT”, “.srt”, “.SUB”, “.sub”, “.TXT” or “.txt”
File extension (MKV):
“.SRT”, “.srt”, “.SSA”, “.ssa”, “.ASS” or “.ass”
The DivX video file and subtitles text file are inside the
same folder, and the file names are the same except for
the file extensions.
Depending on the methods used to create the file or the
state of the recording, only parts of the subtitles may be
displayed, or the subtitles may not be displayed at all.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO:
DivX
®
is a digital video format created by DivX, Inc. This
is an official DivX Certified
®
device that plays DivX video.
Visit divx.com for more information and software tools to
convert your files into DivX video.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND:
This DivX Certified
®
device must be registered in order to
play purchased DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) movies.
To obtain your registration code, locate the DivX VOD
section in your device setup menu.
Go to vod.divx.com for more information on how to
complete your registration.
DivX Registration
You must register this unit to play
protected DivX videos.
The registration code is necessary to
register this unit.
Registration Code:
Please register at www.divx.com/vod/
10 alphanumeric characters
DivX Registration screen
before registration
Displaying subtitle text
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 107 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Reference
VQT3C73
108
Operations that can be performed simultaneously
¾ To simultaneously record/play two programmes which need the same CI module for decryption (> 34)
(: Possible, –: Impossible)
§1
Titles recorded in 1080/60p cannot playback.
§2
DivX and MKV video cannot playback.
§3
AVCHD format titles cannot playback.
§4
BD-Video cannot playback.
Simultaneous operation is not possible while executing the “Flexible Recording via AV input”.
(: Possible, –: Impossible)
§1
The operation will terminate when simultaneous recording is being done and timer recording starts.
§2
Playback of BD-Video will terminate when the timer recording starts from external equipment.
§3
[BST800] When “Pure Sound mode” is set to “On”, timer recording does not start during playback of BD-Video, DVD-Video
or music CD. (> 87)
§4
Executing operation will be terminated.
Operations that can be performed while recording or copying a title
Playback of
HDD
Playback of
discs
Playback of
SD Card
Playback of
photo
Playback of
music
recorded on
HDD
While recording programme
§1
§1, 2
§1
While recording from external equipment
§1
§1, 2, 3, 4
––
While copying in normal speed mode–––––
While copying in high speed mode
[With finalising or creating Top Menu
([+RW])]
–––––
While copying in high speed mode
[Without finalising or creating Top Menu
([+RW])]
––––
Starting the timer recording while executing other operation
Executing operation
Starting of the timer
recording
Executing operation
Starting of the timer
recording
Recording the title
§1
Executing “Flexible Recording via AV
input”
§4
Playing the title
§2, 3
Executing PAUSE LIVE TV/REWIND
LIVE TV
§1
Editing the title Editing photo or music
Copying a title in high speed mode
[without finalising or creating Top
Menu ([+RW])]
Copying photos
Copying a title in high speed mode
[with finalising or creating Top Menu
([+RW])]
Copying music
Copying a title in normal speed mode Formatting
Converting a title in “File Conversion”
(Only when “Now” is selected)
Finalising/Creating Top Menu
Copying HD Video (AVCHD format)
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 108 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Reference
VQT3C73
109
Specifications
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
General
Dimensions (WkHkD):
[BST 800] 430 mmk66 mmk238 mm
[BST700] [BST701] 430 mmk59 mmk238 mm
(excluding the projecting parts)
[BST 800] 430 mmk66 mmk249 mm
[BST700] [BST701] 430 mmk59 mmk249 mm
(including the projecting parts)
Mass: [BST 800] Approx. 3.3 kg
[BST700] [BST701] Approx. 3.2 kg
Power supply: AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz
Power consumption: [BST800] Approx. 64 W
[BST 700] [BST701] Approx. 60 W
“Power Save in Standby” is activated:
Approx. 0.2 W
“Power Save in Standby” is not activated:
Approx. 6.0 W
Operating temperature: 5 oC to 40 oC
Operating humidity range: 10 % to 80 % RH
(no condensation)
TV system
Tuner System: DVB-S/S2
Antenna receive frequency: 950 MHz to 2150 MHz
Input level: –65 dBm to –25 dBm
Input impedance: Nominal 75
Demodulation: QPSK, 8PSK
LNB input:
F shape terminal female, power supply 13 V/18 V
max. 400 mA
LNB output: Not provided
RF converter output: Not provided
DiSEqC: Version 1.0 or Tone burst A/B, 22 kHz 0.65 Vp-p
Video
Video system: PAL / NTSC / SECAM (IN)
Recording system: MPEG2 (Hybrid VBR)/
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
Video in (PAL/NTSC):
AV1/AV2 (21pin) 1 Vp-p (75 )
S-Video in (PAL/NTSC):
AV2 (21 pin) 1 Vp-p (75 )
RGB in (PAL): AV2 (21 pin) 0.7 Vp-p (75 )
Video out (PAL/NTSC):
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Video out (pin jack) 1 Vp-p (75 )
S-Video out (PAL/NTSC):
AV1 (21 pin) 1 Vp-p (75 )
R
GB out (PAL):
AV1 (21 pin) 0.7 Vp-p (75 )
Audio
Recording system:
Dolby Digital (2ch) (XP, SP, LP, EP mode)
Dolby Digital (Max 5.1ch)
(DR, HG, HX, HE, HL, HM mode)
Dolby Digital Plus (Max 5.1ch) (DR mode)
MPEG (2ch) (DR mode)
Audio in: AV1/AV2 (21 pin)
Input level: Standard: 0.5 Vrms,
Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz
Input impedance: More than 10 k
Audio out: AV1/AV2 (21 pin),
Audio output L/R (pin jack)
Output level: Standard: 0.5 Vrms,
Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz
Output impedance: Less than 1 k
Digital audio out:
Optical terminal (PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG)
Coaxial terminal (PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG)
HDMI terminal
(PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG, Dolby Digital Plus,
Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio,
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio)
HDMI Output
[BST800 ] 19 pin type A: 2 pcs
[BST 700] [BST701] 19 pin type A: 1 pc
This unit supports “HDAVI Control 5” function.
Other terminals
USB Port Type A: 2 pcs
SD Card Slot 1 pc
Common Interface slot t2
Compliant with CENELEC EN 50221 : February, 1997.
LAN (Ethernet) Port 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
Internal HDD capacity
[BST800] 500 GB
[BST 700] [BST701] 320 GB
WLAN [BST800]
Antenna: Tx 1, Rx 2
Standard compliance: IEEE802.11n/
IEEE802.11a/IEEE802.11g/
IEEE802.11b
Transmission system: MISO-OFDM system/
OFDM system/DSSS system
Frequency Range:
IEEE802.11n / IEEE802.11a
5.15 GHz-5.35 GHz, 5.47 GHz-5.725 GHz
IEEE802.11g / IEEE802.11b / IEEE802.11n
2.4 GHz-2.4835 GHz
Transfer rate (standard)
§1
:
IEEE802.11n Tx Max 150 Mbps/
Rx Max 300 Mbps
IEEE802.11g / IEEE802.11a Max 54 Mbps
IEEE802.11b Max11 Mbps
Access mode: Infrastructure mode
Security
§2
: WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES)/
WPA-PSK (TKIP/AES)/
WEP (64 bit/128 bit)
§1
Transfer rates are theoretical values; however, actual
communication rate will vary according to
communication environment or connected
equipment.
§2
This unit supports WPA and WPA2 encryption.
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 109 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Reference
VQT3C73
110
Specifications
Recordable discs
BD-RE (SL/DL): 1-2X SPEED (Ver. 2.1)
BD-R (SL/DL): 1-2X SPEED (Ver. 1.1),
1-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2),
1-6X SPEED (Ver. 1.3),
1-2X SPEED LTH type (Ver. 1.2),
1-6X SPEED LTH type (Ver. 1.3)
DVD-RAM: 2X SPEED (Ver. 2.0),
2-3X SPEED (Ver. 2.1), 2-5X SPEED (Ver. 2.2)
DVD-R (SL): 1X SPEED (Ver. 2.0),
1-4X SPEED (Ver. 2.0),
1-8X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 1-16X SPEED (Ver. 2.1)
DVD-R (DL): 2-4X SPEED (Ver. 3.0),
2-8X SPEED (Ver. 3.0)
DVD-RW: 1X SPEED (Ver. 1.1),
1-2X SPEED (Ver. 1.1),
2-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2), 2-6X SPEED (Ver. 1.2)
+R (SL): 2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.0),
2.4-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.1),
2.4-8X SPEED (Ver. 1.2), 2.4-16X SPEED (Ver. 1.3)
+R (DL): 2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.0),
2.4-8X SPEED (Ver. 1.1)
+RW: 2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.1),
2.4-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2)
Optical pick-up
System with 2 lens, 3 integration units
(405 nm wavelength for BDs,
661 nm wavelength for DVDs,
783 nm wavelength for CDs)
LASER specification
Class 1 LASER Product
Wave length:
405 nm (BDs)
661 nm (DVDs)
783 nm (CDs)
Laser power:
Recording system
BD-RE (SL/DL): Blu-ray Disc Rewritable Format
BD-R (SL/DL): Blu-ray Disc Recordable Format
DVD-RAM: DVD Video Recording format
DVD-R (SL/DL): DVD-Video format
DVD-RW: DVD-Video format
+R (SL/DL), +RW
Copying speed from HDD to BD-R in High Speed
Copy
Region code
DVD: #2
BD: Region B
Playable discs
BD-Video (Blu-ray 3D, BD-Live)
BD-ROM Version 2.4
BD-RE: Ver. 2.1, JPEG, MPO
BD-RE DL: Ver. 2.1, JPEG, MPO
BD-R: Ver. 1.3, LTH type Ver 1.3, DivX
§4
, MKV
§4
BD-R DL: Ver 1.3, DivX
§4
, MKV
§4
DVD-RAM: DVD Video Recording format,
AVCHD format, JPEG, MPO
DVD-R: DVD-Video format
§1
,
DVD-Video Recording format
§1
,
AVCHD format
§1
,
JPEG
§
2
,
MPO
§
2
,
MP3
§
2
,
DivX
§
2, 3
, MKV
§
2, 3
DVD-R DL: DVD-Video format
§1
,
DVD-Video Recording format
§1
,
AVCHD format
§1
,
JPEG
§
2
,
MPO
§
2
,
MP3
§
2
,
DivX
§
2, 3
, MKV
§
2, 3
DVD-RW: DVD-Video format
§
1
,
DVD Video Recording format
§
1
, AVCHD format
§
1
+R: Video
§1,
AVCHD format
§1
+R DL: Video
§1,
AVCHD format
§1
+RW: Video
§1,
AVCHD format
§1
DVD-Video: DVD-Video format
CD-Audio: CD-DA
CD-R/CD-RW: CD-DA,
JPEG
§
2
,
MPO
§
2
,
MP3
§
2
,
DivX
§2
, MKV
§
2
SD Card
Compatible media: SD Memory Card
§1
Format: FAT12, FAT16, FAT32
§2
, exFAT
§3
Data that can be played: JPEG, MPO,
AVCHD format, MPEG-2
USB device
USB standard: USB 2.0 High Speed
Format: FAT12, FAT16, FAT32
Data that can be played: MP3, JPEG, MPO,
DivX, MKV
No hazardous radiation is emitted with the safety
protection
Approx.
HDD
1
6X Speed BD-R
(DL, 50 GB/SL, 25 GB)
Recording
Mode
Recorded
Programme
Required
time
Speed
HM 1 hour 1 min. 60x
The above rate in the list indicates the shortest time and fastest
speed required for copying one-hour title from HDD to the disc by
High-Speed copying.
The required amount of time and speed may vary depending on
the conditions such as the area where information is written or
unique feature on the disc.
§1
Finalising is necessary.
§2
ISO9660 level 1 or 2 (except for extended formats),
Joliet
This unit is compatible with multi-session.
This unit is not compatible with packet writing.
§3
UDF1.02 without ISO9660, UDF1.5 with ISO9660
§4
UDF2.5
§1
Includes SDHC, SDXC card.
Includes miniSD
TM
cards (need a miniSD
TM
adaptor).
Includes microSD
TM
/microSDHC
TM
/microSDXC
TM
cards (need a microSD
TM
adaptor).
§2
Not support long file name
§3
SDXC only
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 110 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Reference
VQT3C73
111
The audio output differs depending on which terminals are
connected to the amplifier/receiver, and the setting on this
unit. (> 90, Digital Audio Output)
The number of channels listed is the maximum possible
number of output channels when connected to
amplifier/receiver compatible with the respective audio
format.
§1
When “BD-Video Secondary Audio” is set to “On”, the
audio will be output as Dolby Digital, DTS Digital
Surround or 5.1ch PCM.
§2
The audio output is amplified from 5.1ch or 6.1ch to
7.1ch depending on the DTS, Inc. specifications.
JPEG/MPO
Playable media: HDD, BD-RE (SL/DL), DVD-RAM,
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, CD-R, CD-RW,
SD Card, USB device
Compatible pixels:
Between 34k34 and 8192k8192 pixels
(Sub sampling is 4:2:2 or 4:2:0)
Files: JPEG conforming DCF
(Design rule for Camera File system)
MPO conforming MPF
(Multi Picture Format)
Maximum numbers of folders and files:
MP3
Playable media: HDD, DVD-R, DVD-R DL, CD-R,
CD-RW, USB device
Compression rate: 32 kbps to 320 kbps
Sampling rate: 16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz,
32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz
Maximum numbers of folders and files:
Audio information
Terminal
“Digital Audio Output”
“Bitstream” “PCM”
HDMI AV
OUT
Output using
original audio
§1
BD-Video:
7.1ch PCM
§1, 2
DVD-Video:
5.1ch PCM
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
Dolby Digital/
DTS Digital
Surround
Down-mixed 2ch
PCM
Maximum numbers of titles that
can be recorded
HDD 999 titles
(When continuously recording for long
durations, titles are automatically
divided every 8 hours.)
BD-RE, BD-R 200 titles on one disc.
DVD-RAM,
DVD-R,
DVD-RW
99 titles on one disc.
+R, +RW 49 titles on one disc.
About JPEG/MPO/MP3/DivX/
MKV/MPEG2/AVCHD files
Media
Maximum
folders
Maximum files
HDD 500 20000
BD-RE 500 10000
DVD-RAM 500 10000
DVD-R 500 10000
CD-R, CD-RW 500 10000
SD Card 500 10000
USB device 500 10000
JPEG files must have the extension “.jpg” or “.JPG”.
MPO files must have the extension “.mpo” or “.MPO”.
This unit is not compatible with MOTION JPEG or PROGRESSIVE
JPEG.
Media
Maximum
folders
Maximum files
HDD 40000
DVD-R 300 3000
CD-R, CD-RW 300 3000
USB device 300 3000
MP3 files must have the extension “.mp3” or “.MP3”.
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 111 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Reference
VQT3C73
112
Specifications
DivX
Playable media: BD-R (SL/DL), DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
CD-R, CD-RW, USB device
Official DivX Certified
®
product
DivX Certified to play DivX video up to HD 1080p,
including premium content.
GMC (Global Motion Compensation) is not supported.
Maximum number of folders: 300 folders
(including the root folder)
Maximum number of files: 200 files
Support version
MKV
Playable media: BD-R (SL/DL), DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
CD-R, CD-RW, USB device
MPEG-4 AVC (H.264) profile is up to High Profile,
Level 4.
AAC-LC, MP3, Dolby Digital audio, DTS and PCM can
be decoded.
Maximum number of folders: 300 folders
(including the root folder)
Maximum number of files: 200 files
SD-Video (Standard Definition)
Playable media: SD Card
§1
, USB device
§2
Codec: MPEG2
File Format:
§1
Video Recording conversion and transfer is possible
from SD card to HDD or DVD-RAM disc.
After Video Recording conversion and transfer to
HDD or DVD-RAM disc is completed, the playback
becomes possible.
§2
Video Recording conversion and transfer is possible
from USB device to HDD or DVD-RAM disc.
After Video Recording conversion and transfer to
HDD or DVD-RAM disc is completed, the playback
becomes possible.
§3
SD-Video Entertainment Video Profile
HD-Video (High Definition)
Playable media: SD Card, USB device
§
Codec: MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
File Format: AVCHD format conforming
§
Video Recording conversion and transfer is possible
from USB device to HDD, BD-RE (SL/DL) or BD-R
(SL/DL) disc.
After Video Recording conversion and transfer to
HDD, BD-RE (SL/DL) or BD-R (SL/DL) disc is
completed, the playback becomes possible.
Extension
Files must have the extension “.DIVX”, “.divx”, “.AVI” or “.avi”.
Picture resolution
Up to 1920k1080 pixels
Video
Number of stream: Up to 1
Codec: DIV3, DIV4, DIVX, DV50, DIV6
FPS (Frame Per Second): Up to 60 fps
Audio
Number of stream: Up to 8
Format: MP3, MPEG, Dolby Digital
Multi channel: Dolby Digital is possible. MPEG multi is 2 ch
conversion.
DVD-R and DVD-R DL must conform to UDF 1.02 without ISO9660
and UDF 1.5 with ISO9660.
MKV files must have the extension “.MKV” or “.mkv”.
SD-Video format
§3
used on Standard Definition
Camera (Panasonic and some other’s)
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 112 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Reference
VQT3C73
113
Depending on the content being recorded, the recording time may become shorter than indicated.
DR mode
Recording time of DR mode may vary depending on bit rate of broadcasting:
High Definition (HD) quality: estimated bit rate is 14 Mbps
Standard Definition (SD) quality: estimated bit rate is 5 Mbps
Regarding recording time remaining:
Remaining time in the DR mode is calculated with a bit rate of approx. 14 Mbps. But the bit rate differs depending on the
broadcast, so the displayed remaining time might be different from the actual remaining time.
Other recording modes
§
When “Recording time in EP mode” is set to “6 hours” (> 88)
Regarding recording time remaining:
This unit records using a VBR (Variable bit rate) data compression system to vary recorded data segments to match video
data segments which may cause differences in the displayed amount of time and space remaining for recording.
Recording modes and approximate recording times
Recording Mode HDD BD-RE, BD-R
[BST800]
(500 GB)
[BST 700] [BST701]
(320 GB)
Single Layer
(25 GB)
Dual Layer
(50 GB)
DR (HD quality) 75 hours 45 hours 3 hours 30 min. 7 hours 30 min.
DR (SD quality) 211 hours 129 hours 10 hours 15 min. 21 hours
Recording
Mode
HDD BD-RE, BD-R DVD-RAM DVD-R,
DVD-RW,
+R,
+RW
(4.7 GB)
DVD-R DL,
+R DL
(8.5 GB)
[BST800]
(500 GB)
[BST700 ]
[BST701 ]
(320 GB)
Single
Layer
(25 GB)
Dual Layer
(50 GB)
Single-
sided
(4.7 GB)
Double-
sided
(9.4 GB)
HG 78 hours 48 hours 4 hours 8 hours
HX 117 hours 73 hours 6 hours 12 hours
HE 176 hours 110 hours 9 hours 18 hours
HL 235 hours 147 hours 12 hours 24 hours
HM 341 hours 214 hours 17 hours
30 min.
35 hours
XP 107 hours 66 hours 5 hours
15 min.
10 hours
30 min.
1 hour 2 hours 1 hour 1 hour
45 min.
SP 215 hours 134 hours 10 hours
30 min.
21 hours 2 hours 4 hours 2 hours 3 hours
35 min.
LP 430 hours 269 hours 21 hours 42 hours 4 hours 8 hours 4 hours 7 hours
10 min.
EP (6 hours)
§
645 hours 404 hours 31 hours
30 min.
63 hours 6 hours 12 hours 6 hours 10 hours
45 min.
EP (8 hours) 860 hours 538 hours 42 hours 84 hours 8 hours 16 hours 8 hours 14 hours
20 min.
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 113 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Reference
VQT3C73
114
Licenses
“AVCHD” and the “AVCHD” logo are trademarks of Panasonic
Corporation and Sony Corporation.
DivX
®
, DivX Certified
®
and associated logos are trademarks of DivX,
Inc. and are used under license.
DLNA, the DLNA Logo and DLNA CERTIFIED are trademarks, service
marks, or certification marks of the Digital Living Network Alliance.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942;
5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,392,195;
7,272,567; 7,333,929; 7,212,872 & other U.S. and worldwide patents
issued & pending.
DTS and the Symbol are registered trademarks, & DTS-HD, DTS-HD
Master Audio | Essential and the DTS logos are trademarks of DTS, Inc.
Product includes software.
© DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
“DVD Logo” is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation.
MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS
and Thomson.
This product is licensed under the AVC patent portfolio license and
VC-1 patent portfolio license for the personal and non-commercial use
of a consumer to (i) encode video in compliance with the AVC Standard
and VC-1 Standard (“AVC/VC-1 Video”) and/or (ii) decode AVC/VC-1
Video that was encoded by a consumer engaged in a personal and
non-commercial activity and/or was obtained from a video provider
licensed to provide AVC/VC-1 Video. No license is granted or shall be
implied for any other use. Additional information may be obtained from
MPEG LA, LLC.
See http://www.mpegla.com.
This item incorporates copy protection technology that is protected by
U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights of Rovi Corporation.
Reverse engineering and disassembly are prohibited.
SDXC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
Skype, associated trade marks and logos and the “ ” logo are trade
marks of Skype Limited.
DiSEqC™ is a trademark of EUTELSAT.
The “CI Plus” Logo is a trademark of CI Plus LLP.
VIERA CAST is a trademark of Panasonic Corporation.
The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED Logo is a certification mark of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
Gracenote
®
Corporate Description
Music and video recognition technology and related data are
provided by Gracenote
®
. Gracenote is the industry standard in
music recognition technology and related content delivery. For more
information, please visit www.gracenote.com.
Gracenote
®
Proprietary Legends
CD, DVD, Blu-ray Disc, and music and video-related data from
Gracenote, Inc., copyright © 2000 to present Gracenote. Gracenote
Software, copyright © 2000 to present Gracenote. One or more
patents owned by Gracenote apply to this product and service. See
the Gracenote website for a non-exhaustive list of applicable
Gracenote patents. Gracenote, CDDB, MusicID, MediaVOCS, the
Gracenote logo and logotype, and the “Powered by Gracenote” logo
are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Gracenote in the
United States and/or other countries.
Gracenote
®
End User License Agreement
This application or device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of
Emeryville, California (“Gracenote”). The software from Gracenote
(the “Gracenote Software”) enables this application to perform disc
and/or file identification and obtain music-related information,
including name, artist, track, and title information (“Gracenote Data”)
from online servers or embedded databases (collectively, “Gracenote
Servers”) and to perform other functions. You may use Gracenote
Data only by means of the intended End-User functions of this
application or device.
You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software,
and Gracenote Servers for your own personal non-commercial use
only. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the
Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to any third party. YOU
AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT
AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive license to use the Gracenote Data,
the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you
violate these restrictions. If your license terminates, you agree to
cease any and all use of the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software,
and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves all rights in Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and the Gracenote Servers, including
all ownership rights. Under no circumstances will Gracenote become
liable for any payment to you for any information that you provide. You
agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its rights under this Agreement
against you directly in its own name.
The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to track queries for
statistical purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric
identifier is to allow the Gracenote service to count queries without
knowing anything about who you are. For more information, see the
web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote service.
The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote Data are
licensed to you “AS IS.” Gracenote makes no representations or
warranties, express or implied, regarding the accuracy of any
Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves
the right to delete data from the Gracenote Servers or to change data
categories for any cause that Gracenote deems sufficient. No
warranty is made that the Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers
are error-free or that functioning of Gracenote Software or Gracenote
Servers will be uninterrupted. Gracenote is not obligated to provide
you with new enhanced or additional data types or categories that
Gracenote may provide in the future and is free to discontinue its
services at any time.
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT.
GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL
BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE
OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE
BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES.
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 114 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Reference
VQT3C73
115
[BST80 0] (Français)
[BST80 0] (Italiano)
This product incorporates the following software or technology:
(1) the software developed independently by or for Panasonic
Corporation,
(2) the software owned by third party and licensed to Panasonic
Corporation,
(3) the software developed by the Independent JPEG Group,
(4) the software developed by the Freetype Project,
(5) the software licensed under the GNU LESSER General Public
License (LGPL) and/or,
(6) open sourced software other than the software licensed under the
LGPL,
(7) Windows Media digital right management technology (WM-DRM)
licensed by Microsoft Corporation or its affiliates.
For the software categorized as (5), please refer to the terms and conditions of
LGPL, as the case may be at
http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html
In addition, the software categorized as (5) are copyrighted by several
individuals. Please refer to the copyright notice of those individuals at
http://www.am-linux.jp/dl/FCRCP11/
The LGPL software is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY, without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
At least three (3) years from delivery of products, Panasonic will give to any
third party who contacts us at the contact information provided below, for a
charge no more than our cost of physically performing source code distribution,
a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code covered
under LGPL.
Contact Information
cdrequest@am-linux.jp
Source code covered under LGPL is also freely available to you and any other
member of the public via our website below.
http://www.am-linux.jp/dl/FCRCP11/
For the software categorized as (5) and (6), please refer to the applicable
license terms included in the “Software Licence” menu on product.
Further, for WM-DRM categorized as (7), please be aware of the following.
(a) This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft.
Use or distribution of this technology outside of this product is prohibited
without a license from Microsoft or an authorized Microsoft subsidiary.
(b) Content providers are using the digital rights management technology for
Windows Media contained in this device
(“WM-DRM”) to protect the integrity of their content (“Secure Content”) so that
their intellectual property, including copyright, in such content is not
misappropriated. This device uses WM-DRM software to play Secure Content
(“WM-DRM Software”). If the security of the WM-DRM Software in this device
has been compromised, owners of Secure Content (“Secure Content Owners”)
may request that Microsoft revoke the WM-DRM Software’s right to acquire
new licenses to copy, display and/or play Secure Content.
Revocation does not alter the WM-DRM Software’s ability to play unprotected
content. A list of revoked WM-DRM Software is sent to your device whenever
you download a license for Secure Content from the Internet or from a PC.
Microsoft may, in conjunction with such license, also download revocation lists
onto your device on behalf of Secure Content Owners.
HDAVI Control™ is a trademark of Panasonic Corporation.
HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the
United States and other countries.
Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the United States
and other countries.
Windows is a trademark or a registered trademark of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and other countries.
YouTube and Picasa are trademarks of Google, Inc.
Déclaration de Conformité (DoC)
Par les présentes,Panasonic Corporation” déclare que ce
produit est conformes aux critères essentiels et autres
dispositions applicables de la Directive 1999/5/CE.
Les clients peuvent télécharger un exemplaire de la DoC
originale concernant nos produits relevant de la Directive
R&TTE sur notre serveur DoC:
http://www.doc.panasonic.de
Contact du Représentant Autorisé : Panasonic Marketing
Europe GmbH,
Panasonic Testing Centre, Winsbergring 15, 22525
Hambourg, Allemagne
Ce produit est destiné à être utilisé dans les pays suivants.
Autriche, Belgique, Bulgarie, Chypre, République Tchèque,
Danemark, Finlande, France, Allemagne, Grèce, Hongrie,
Irlande, Italie, Islande, Liechtenstein, Luxembourg, Malte,
Pays-Bas, Norvège, Pologne, Portugal, Roumanie, Slovaquie,
Slovénie, Espagne, Suède, Royaume-Uni, Suisse
Ce produit est destiné aux particuliers. (Catégorie 3)
La fonction sans fil de ce produit doit être utilisée
exclusivement en intérieur.
Ce produit est conçu en vue de la connexion à des points
d'acs de réseaux sans fil 2,4 GHz ou 5 GHz.
Dichiarazione di conformità (DoC)
Con il presente atto,Panasonic Corporation” dichiara che
questo prodotto è conforme ai requisiti base e altre
disposizioni applicabili della direttiva 1999/5/EC.
I clienti possono scaricare una copia della DoC originale
per i nostri prodotti R&TTE dal nostro server DoC:
http://www.doc.panasonic.de
Contatti del Rappresentante Autorizzato: Panasonic
Marketing Europe GmbH,
Panasonic Testing Centre, Winsbergring 15, 22525
Hamburg, Germania
Questo prodotto è destinato ai seguenti paesi.
Austria, Belgio, Bulgaria, Cipro, Repubblica Ceca, Danimarca,
Finlandia, Francia, Germania, Grecia, Ungheria, Irlanda, Italia,
Islanda, Liechtenstein, Lussemburgo, Malta, Olanda,
Norvegia, Polonia, Portogallo, Romania, Slovacchia, Slovenia,
Spagna, Svezia, Regno Unito, Svizzera
Questo prodotto è stato realizzato per il mercato General
Consumer. (Categoria 3)
La funzionalità WLAN di questo prodotto dovrà essere
utilizzata esclusivamente all'interno di edifici.
Questo prodotto è realizzato per connettersi a un Access
Point di reti WLAN da 2,4 GHz o 5 GHz.
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 115 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Reference
VQT3C73
116
Glossary
AVCHD
AVCHD is a new format (standard) for High Definition video
cameras that can be used to record and play high-resolution
HD images.
BD-J
Some BD-Video discs contain Java applications, and these
applications are called BD-J. You can enjoy various
interactive features in addition to playing normal video.
Bitstream
This is the digital form of multi-channel audio data (e.g.,
5.1 channel) before it is decoded into its various channels.
CI (Common Interface)
Common Interface is a defined standard, to enable the
addition of a CAM (Conditional Access Module) in a Digital
TV/Recorder.
CI Plus
CI Plus is a technical specification that adds additional
security and features to the proven DVB Common Interface
Standard that will allow CI Plus compatible consumer
electronics devices, such as Integrated Digital Televisions
and Set Top Boxes, access to a wide range of Pay TV
Services via a Plug-in CI Plus CAM wherever the CI Plus
Technology is supported by the local Pay TV Provider.
CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable Media)
CPRM is technology used to protect broadcasts that are
allowed to be recorded only once. Such broadcasts can be
recorded only with CPRM compatible recorders and discs.
DLNA (Digital Living Network Alliance)
DLNA is a standard that makes DLNA Certified digital
electronics easier and more convenient to use on a home
network.
This unit works both as a server and a client: You can enjoy
the video and photos saved on the HDD of this unit on DLNA
(Client) compatible equipment connected via a network.
Additionally, You can enjoy viewing video, photos and music
saved on a DLNA Certified media server and Panasonic
DLNA compatible recorders.
DiSEqC (Digital Satellite Equipment Control)
Digital Satellite Equipment Control is a control system for
selecting several LNBs at one input.
Dolby Digital
This is a method of coding digital signals developed by
Dolby Laboratories. Apart from stereo (2-channel) audio,
these signals can also be multi-channel audio.
Dolby Digital Plus
Multi-channel audio and higher audio quality is made
possible using Dolby Digital Plus. BD-Video supports up to
7.1 channel output.
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is a very high quality audio format that
reproduces the studio master audio. BD-Video supports up
to 7.1 channel output.
Down-mixing
This is the process of remixing the multi-channel audio
found on some discs into fewer channels.
DTS (Digital Theater Systems)
This surround system is used in many movie theatres. There
is good separation between the channels, so realistic sound
effects are possible.
DTS-HD
DTS-HD is a high-quality, sophisticated audio format used in
movie theatres. Previous DTS Digital Surround-compatible
equipment can play DTS-HD as DTS Digital Surround audio.
BD-Video supports up to 7.1 channel output.
Dynamic range
Dynamic range is the difference between the lowest level of
sound that can be heard above the noise of the equipment
and the highest level of sound before distortion occurs.
Dynamic range compression means reducing the gap
between the loudest and softest sounds. This means you
can listen at low volumes but still hear dialogue clearly.
Finalise
A process that makes play of a recorded CD-R, CD-RW,
DVD-R, etc. possible on equipment that can play such
media. You can finalise BD-R, DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW
(DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL on this unit.
After finalising, the disc becomes play-only and you can no
longer record or edit. However, finalised DVD-RW can be
formatted for recording again.
Formatting
Formatting is the process of making media such as
DVD-RAM recordable on recording equipment.
You can format BD-RE, DVD-RAM, DVD-RW (only as
DVD-Video format), +RW, SD cards and the HDD or unused
BD-R, +R and +R DL on this unit.
Formatting permanently deletes all contents.
Frames and fields
Frames refer to the single images that constitute the video
you see on your TV. Each frame consists of two fields.
A frame still shows two fields, so there may be some
blurring, but picture quality is generally better.
A field still shows less picture information so it may be
rougher, but there is no blurring.
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)
Unlike conventional connections, it transmits uncompressed
digital video and audio signals on a single cable. This unit
supports high-definition video output [720p (750p), 1080i
(1125i), 1080p (1125p)] from HDMI AV OUT terminals. To
enjoy high-definition video a High Definition compatible TV
is required.
Frame Field Field
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 116 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Reference
VQT3C73
117
JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group)
This is a system used for compressing/decoding colour still
pictures. If you select JPEG as the storage system on digital
cameras, etc., the data will be compressed to 1/10–1/100 of
its original size. The benefit of JPEG is less deterioration in
picture quality considering the degree of compression.
LNB (Low Noise Block - converter)
This is attached to the satellite dish, which will amplify the
weak signal that was received, lower the frequency, and
input into the tuner.
Local storage
This storage area is used as a destination for sub contents
for playing virtual packages on BD-Video.
LPCM (Linear PCM)
These are uncompressed digital signals, similar to those
found on CDs.
MPEG2 (Moving Picture Experts Group)
A standard for efficiently compressing and expanding colour
video. MPEG2 is a compression standard used for DVD and
satellite based digital broadcasting.
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
A standard for efficiently compressing and expanding colour
video. MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 is an encoding method used for
recording of the High Definition video.
MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3)
An audio compression method that compresses audio to
approximately one tenth of its size without any considerable
loss of audio quality.
Pan&Scan/Letterbox
In general, BD-Video and DVD-Video are produced with the
intention that they be viewed on a widescreen TV (16:9
aspect ratio), so images often don’t fit regular (4:3 aspect
ratio) TVs. Two styles of picture, “Pan & Scan” and
“Letterbox”, deal with this problem.
Progressive/Interlace
Interlace is a conventional image signal that displays the
image in 2 phases by splitting the display into odd and even
scans.
Progressive will display whole image in 1 scan. Therefore, it
will give High Definition image without flickering compared
with interlace.
Protection
You can prevent accidental deletion by setting writing
protection or deletion protection.
Sampling frequency
Sampling is the process of converting the heights of sound
wave (analog signal) samples taken at set periods into digits
(digital encoding). Sampling frequency is the number of
samples taken per second, so larger numbers mean more
faithful reproduction of the original sound.
Signal Quality
This is the guide for checking the aerial direction. The
numbered values displayed do not indicate the strength of
the signal, but the quality of the signal (the signal to noise
ratio, or “S/N”). The channels you can receive are affected
by weather conditions, seasons, time (day/night), region,
length of the cable that is connected to the aerial, etc.
Thumbnail
This refers to a miniature representation of a picture used to
display multiple pictures in the form of a list.
Transponder
The signals of a broadcasting station are received by a
transponder on a satellite. The transponder converts them to
frequencies and sends them to satellite dishes near the
ground. A transponder can broadcast several TV and radio
programmes or data in parallel.
1080i
In one High Definition image, 1080 (1125) alternating scan
lines pass every 1/50
th
of a second to create an interlace
image. Because 1080i (1125i) more than doubles current TV
broadcasts of 480i (525i), the detail is much clearer and
creates a more realistic and rich image.
1080p
In one High Definition image, 1080 (1125) scan lines pass at
the same time every 1/50
th
of a second to create a
progressive image. Since progressive video does not
alternate scan lines like interlace, there is a minimal amount
of screen flicker.
24p
This is a progressive image recorded at a rate of 24 frames
per second.
720p
In one High Definition image, 720 (750) scan lines pass at
the same time every 1/50
th
of a second to create a
progressive image. Since progressive video does not
alternate scan lines like interlace, there is a minimal amount
of screen flicker.
Pan & Scan: The sides are cut off so the
picture fills the screen.
Letterbox: Black bands appear at the
top and bottom of the picture
so the picture itself appears in
an aspect ratio of 16:9.
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 117 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Reference
VQT3C73
118
Index
A
Amplifier (Connection)
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
HDMI AV OUT terminal . . . . . 18, 19
Aspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91, 98
Audio
Broadcasts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Digital Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Auto Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 85
AVCHD . . . . . . . . . . . . 40, 58, 72, 112
B
BD-Live . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 87
BD-Video
BD-Live . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 87
Picture-in-picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
BD-Video Parental Control . . . . . . 87
C
CAM
(
Conditional Access Module
) . . . . 12
Change Thumbnail . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Channel information . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Channel List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 51
Chapter Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
CI Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 13, 97
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Common Interface . . . . . . . . . . 12, 92
Connection
Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Audio/Video terminals . . . . . . . . . . 17
Basic connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Common Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
HDMI cable . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 18, 19
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Set Top Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Video equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
21-pin Scart terminals . . . . . . . . . . 17
Copy (Music) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Copy (Photo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Copy (Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Copy title playing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Finalised disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
HD Video (AVCHD) . . . . . . . . 58, 72
SD Video (MPEG2) . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Create Top Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
D
Delete
Delete BD-Video data . . . . . . . . . 75
Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Photo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Delete all photos
HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Delete all titles
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Delete BD-Video data . . . . . . . . . . 75
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Photo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Disc
Create Top Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Delete all titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Finalise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Media information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Playback menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Top menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Display Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Divide Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
DivX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107, 112
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Subtitle text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
DLNA
Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80, 94
DVD-Video
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
DVD-Video Parental Control . . . . 87
E
Easy setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Edit (Music) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Edit (Photo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Edit (Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 51
Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 48
File Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
F
Favourites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
File Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Finalise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Format
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
SD Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
FUNCTION MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
G
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Gracenote
®
Database . . . . . . . . . . 66
H
HD Video (AVCHD) . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 72
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
HDAVI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78, 92
HDD
Delete all photos . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Delete all titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Media information . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
HDMI cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
HOLD function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
I
Information
Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
J
JPEG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60, 111
L
Language code list . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Lens cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Linked Timer Recording . . . . . . . .71
M
Manual Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Media
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
SD Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6, 9
USB memories . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6, 8
Menu screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
MKV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107, 112
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Subtitle text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
MPEG2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73, 112
MPO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60, 111
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66, 111
Music
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
DIRECT NAVIGATOR . . . . . . . . . .67
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Gracenote
®
Database . . . . . . . . . .66
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
N
Network
BD-Live . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
DLNA (Client) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
DLNA (Server) . . . . . . . . . . . . .80, 94
Gracenote
®
Database . . . . . . . . . .66
Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Software (Firmware) Update . . . . .97
VIERA CAST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Network easy setting . . . . . . . .23, 93
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 118 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
Reference
VQT3C73
119
P
Partial Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
PAUSE LIVE TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Photo
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
DIRECT NAVIGATOR . . . . . . . . . .60
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60, 68
Picture
Playback menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Picture-in-picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Play
Playback menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Playback menu
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Playback (Music)
Audio CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Recorded on HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Playback (Photo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60, 68
Playback (Video)
BD-Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
BD-Video Parental Control . . . . . .87
Changing audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
DivX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
DVD-Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
DVD-Video Parental Control . . . . .87
Playlist created on other
equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Recorded video contents . . . . . . .40
Status message . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Teletext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Power Save in Standby . . . . . . . . .94
Protection
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
HOLD function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Photo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
SD Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Pure Sound Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
R
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Aspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Direct TV Recording . . . . . . . . . . . 33
From external equipment . . . . . . . 70
High speed copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Recording mode . . . . . . . . . . . 6, 113
Recording time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
2 programmes simultaneous
recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Recording mode . . . . . . . . . . . 6, 113
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
HOLD function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Manufacturer and Code No. . . . . . 98
Remote control code . . . . . . . . . . 95
TV operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96, 105
REWIND LIVE TV . . . . . . . . . . . 30, 87
S
Screen saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
SD Card
Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Media information . . . . . . . . . . . . 6, 9
miniSD / microSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
SD Video (MPEG2) . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Setting
Auto Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Easy setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Network easy setting . . . . . . . 23, 93
Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
HDD / Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Signal condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Skype
TM
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 68
Smart Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Software (Firmware)
Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Sound
Playback menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Subtitles
Broadcasts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
DivX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
MKV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
T
Teletext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 90
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Auto Renewal Recording . . . . . . . 36
Confirm and edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Manually programming timer
recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Top menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Tuning
Channel List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Manual Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Signal condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Turning on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
TV Guide
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
TV system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
U
Unit’s display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
USB memories
Media information . . . . . . . . . . . 6, 8
V
Video
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
DIRECT NAVIGATOR . . . . . . . . . 41
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 40
Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
VIERA CAST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
VIERA Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78, 92
3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 119 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical
and electronic products and batteries should not be mixed with general household waste.
For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take them to
applicable collection points, in accordance with your national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC
and 2006/66/EC.
By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and
prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise
from inappropriate waste handling.
For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries, please contact your
local municipality, your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items.
Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste, in accordance with national legislation.
For business users in the European Union
If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for
further information.
[Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union]
These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact
your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.
Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples):
This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with the
requirement set by the Directive for the chemical involved.
Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment and used Batteries
Cd
The recording and playback of content on this or any other device may require permission from the owner of the
copyright or other such rights in that content. Panasonic has no authority to and does not grant you that permission and
explicitly disclaims any right, ability or intention to obtain such permission on your behalf. It is your responsibility to
ensure that your use of this or any other device complies with applicable copyright legislation in your country. Please
refer to that legislation for more information on the relevant laws and regulations involved or contact the owner of the
rights in the content you wish to record or playback.
Pursuant to at the directive 2004/108/EC, article 9(2)
Panasonic Testing Centre
Panasonic Marketing Europe GmbH
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Germany
Environment friendly printed on chlorine free bleached paper.
EU
Panasonic Corporation
Web Site: http://panasonic.net
© Panasonic Corporation 2011
p
VQT3C73
F0511MD0
DMRBST800700701EG_eng.book 120 ページ 2011年4月26日 火曜日 午後5時27分
120

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Panasonic DMR-BST700 bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Panasonic DMR-BST700 in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 5,43 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van Panasonic DMR-BST700

Panasonic DMR-BST700 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Deutsch - 120 pagina's


Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info